Tracer™ SC Air Systems Application Guide

Applications Guide
Air Systems
for Tracer™ SC
December 2009 BAS-APG007-EN

Copyright
© 2009 Trane All rights reserved
This document and the information in it are the property of Trane and may not be used or
reproduced in whole or in part, without the written permission of Trane. Trane reserves the right
to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify
any person of such revision or change.
Trademarks
Trane and its logo are trademarks of Trane in the United States and other countries. All trademarks
referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notices

Warnings, cautions, and notices are provided in appropriate places throughout this document:
 WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTICE: Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or property-damage- only
accidents.
©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF TRANE. 1
MAY ONLY BE USED IN THE CONDUCT OF TRANE BUSINESS.
Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Who Does What and When? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Some Assumptions About the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
VAV Air System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Building Automation System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tracer SC Variable-Air-Volume Air System Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Air Handling Unit (AHU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
VAV Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How VAV Boxes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Parallel Fan-Powered Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Series Fan-Powered Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How the Air Handler Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Variable Volume Air Handling Units (VAV AHUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
How the System Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Zone Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installing the VAV Discharge Air Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installing a Hot Water Valve (Local Heat and Remote Heat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Air Handler Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Air Handler Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Why Use a DAC Profile for an Air Handler on a LonTalk Link? . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pre-Configuration Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
General LonTalk Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Controller Setup (IntelliPak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VAV Box Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable Volume and

Constant Volume Air Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Programming the MP580/581 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling Profiles for the MP580/581 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configure the Inputs/Outputs/Variables ............................ 49
2 BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009
Install the MP580/581 on the Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Integrating the MP580/581 Controller with Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Communicating Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tracer Graphical Programming (in the MP580/581 using Rover) . . . . . . . . . 57
Pre-Packaged Solutions Sample PPS Graphics.tgp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Programming the Field-Applied BACnet Unit Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
VAV System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Common Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Defining Areas and Selecting Area Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Assigning the VAS Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
How Area and VAS Interact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
How Schedule and Area Determine Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
How Area Determines the Operating Mode of the VAV Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tracer SC Application Setup for Variable Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tracer SC Equipment Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Install and Set Up the Variable Air Volume Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Set Up Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Navigating Through the VAS Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
VAV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Auto-Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Commissioning and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Standard Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Optimal Start (PreCool/Morning Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Humidity Pull Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Warm-up with Normal Start (No Optimal Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Daytime Warm-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Optimal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Night Purge (Night Economizing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Unoccupied Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Unoccupied Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Timed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Best Practice for Commissioning: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Air Handler Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Commissioning the Communications Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 3
Preliminary Checkout for LonTalk Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Finding a Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Finding an Open Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Preliminary Checkout for BACnet Communication Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Auto-commission the Tracer VV550/551 and UC400 Controllers . . . . . . . . 149
Things to Consider Before Auto-commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Auto-commissioning Individual VAV Boxes with the Service Tools . . . . . 150
Auto-commissioning All VAV Boxes with Tracer SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Interpreting the Auto-commissioning Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Perform Air and Water Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Duct Static Pressure Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Static Pressure Sensor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setup Instructions for a Variable Volume Air Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setup Instructions for an MP580/581 Air Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tracer SC VAS Duct Static Pressure Optimization Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Ventilation Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Zone Level Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
System Level Action ......................................... 166
Ventilation Ratio Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Default Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Ventilation Optimization Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Ventilation Optimization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Dedicated Ventilation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Flow Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Auto-commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Manual Output Testing for VV550/551 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Manual Output Testing for UC400 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Sequences of Operation for Standard Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
General Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Optimal Start (Cooling Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Optimal Start (Heating Mode)(Central Heat Used/Local Heat Not Used
or Not Present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Optimal Start (Heating Mode)(Local Heat with a Central Fan) . . . . . . . . . . 205
Humidity Pull-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4 BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009
Normal Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Optimal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Unoccupied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Cooling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with Central Heat . . . . . . . . 219
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with Local Heat and
a Central Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with
Local Heat and No Central Fan for Night Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Night Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Unoccupied Humidify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Unoccupied Dehumidify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Timed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Communications Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Isolating Problem VAV Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Appendix A: Controller Flow Settings Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Appendix B: Tracer SC Mapping to MP580/581 Network
Variable Inputs (nvi) and Profile Associations . . . . . . . . 241
Appendix C: Member Occupancy Response to Area and
VAS Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Appendix D: Area and VAS Rank Arbitration for
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Appendix E: Equipment Response to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Appendix F: Tracer SC Priority Levels and Assigned
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Appendix G: Trane Equipment Response to Optimal Start
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Appendix H: Common Tracer SC Enumerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 5
Introduction
What is VAS?
The Variable-Air-Volume Air System (VAS), available in Tracer SC, permits you to control and
coordinate air handlers and VAV boxes. The Tracer SC VAS includes valuable tools to help manage
tasks that were previously problematic and time consuming, such as:
• Coordinating AHU and VAV box operation
• Commissioning VAV boxes
• Scheduling common spaces
• Optimizing ventilation
• Optimizing duct static pressure
Objectives
This guide presents a process to efficiently implement a basic, single-duct VAV air system.
Following this recommended process should allow you to design and install a VAV air system that
is easy to set up, works well from the outset, and requires minimal adjustment later.
Note: Because this applications guide focuses on standardizing and simplifying the process, it
does not address Hybrid VAV systems such as dual duct, loop duct, and changeover bypass,
which require customization.
With the instructions provided in this guide, you should know or be able to find out:
• What to think about when designing a project
• How best to install the equipment
• The most efficient way to set up the equipment and configure the VAV air system
• Best practices for configuring an MP580/581 using the DAC profile
• How to set up the standard functions for a VAV air system (Unoccupied Heating/Cooling,
Optimal Start, etc.)
• The best way to commission a project
• How to optimize the VAV air system and implement special applications
• How best to maintain the equipment and the VAV air system
Overall Recommended Process

For best results, follow this recommended process:
1. Install, configure, and commission a basic system and make sure that it functions fully as
expected. This provides a solid fall-back point you can use if you run into any issues during
optimization (step 2).
2. Optimize and enhance the basic system, adding more complex strategies as needed to improve
performance and achieve your goals.
By completing these steps in order, you may find it easier to isolate problems if they arise.
Best Practices
The best practices in this manual are interrelated and build on each other. They will help you save
time and reduce cost. They are interspersed throughout the manual in colored boxes with a best
practice star in the margin (as shown below). It is important to follow these best practices at each
phase of the project to help ensure success in later phases.
This is a best practice box. They are located throughout the applications guide to call attention
Best to important information and highlight best practices.
Practice

6 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF TRANE. BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009
Introduction
Who Does What and When?

Figure 1 shows which people make decisions or perform tasks relating directly to the VAS system,
and when those tasks and decisions occur. This illustration is repeated at the beginning of each
section, with the appropriate step in the cycle highlighted. The project life-cycle shown in Figure 1
is reflected in the structure of this applications guide.
Figure 1. Project life-cycle and responsibilities
Pipefitter - Mechanical Contractor

Control System Design Engineer Electrician - Power
Electrician - Controls
BAS Technician, Verification/Equipment Setup
Design
Install BAS Technician(s)

BAS Technician(s)
Program Air/Water Balance Contractor
Commission Building Operator

Order has been placed
Operate BAS Technician
Optimize Service Technician
Maintain
Some Assumptions About the Reader

To plan for, create, and maintain a VAV air system in a Tracer SC facility, you must understand the
following:
• The nine different types of points they’ll find in the system:
– Analog, binary, and multi-state outputs
– Analog, binary, and multi-state inputs
– Analog, binary, and multi-state values
• How to use the Tracer TU and Rover service tools
• How to program TGP2
• The concept of a priority array
• How to accomplish simple and advanced overrides
• How to use referencers
For specific information on these concepts and tasks, refer to the Tracer SC online help or complete
the Tracer SC Air Systems class through the Trane College of Automation.

VAV Air System Components
VAV air systems are unique to the buildings they service. Some are complex, using dual duct, loop
duct, and changeover bypass configurations that require special treatment at every phase of
implementation. However, most VAV air systems are single-duct configurations composed of an
air handler, ductwork, VAV boxes, and diffusers (refer to Figure 2). This guide focuses on these
basic VAV air systems.
Although some installations utilize more specialized applications (such as ventilation optimization,
or duct static pressure optimization) most are just extensions of the basic VAV air system.
Figure 2. Single-duct VAV air system
AHU Ductwork
VAV boxes
Diffusers (not shown)

(Each VAV box may have
multiple diffusers)
Air Handling Unit (AHU)

The primary function of the AHU is to supply cold or hot air to the system depending on the
configuration of the unit and the requirements within the system at any given time.
The AHU always has a cooling source—either a chilled water (CW) coil or a direct expansion (DX)
coil, and it may also have the option to use outdoor air for cooling (economizing).
The AHU typically has a source of outdoor air for ventilation purposes. It may also have a heat
source used to temper the primary air and/or to provide additional heat for Morning Warm-up and

Unoccupied Heating. Heating options include gas (staged or modulating), hydronic (hot water or
steam), or electric (staged or modulating).
A VAV AHU typically has a variable speed supply fan controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD)
to maintain static pressure in the ductwork. The AHU may also have exhaust or return air fans
installed, which are not discussed in this applications guide.
Ductwork
Ductwork provides the airflow path for a VAV air system connecting the AHU to the VAV boxes and
diffusers.
VAV boxes
VAV boxes (also referred to as VAV terminal units) contain an airflow damper, an airflow sensor,
a fan (optional), and a heat source (optional). There are four basic types of VAV boxes: Shutoff, VAV
box with reheat, VAV box with parallel fan, VAV with series fan (refer to Figure 3). A project may
use only one type of VAV box throughout the installation; however, it is more common that a variety
of VAV boxes are installed and used for specific purposes depending on their location in the
building or within each zone.
Figure 3. VAV boxes: how they work and how they are used
Shutoff VAV How it works

Shutoff VAV boxes control the flow of supply air to the space to
maintain a zone temperature at setpoint. Typically, each VAV box
From To
is wired to a temperature sensor in the zone.
AHU Space
Common applications
They are typically used in cooling-only applications that do not
require heat during occupied hours.
VAV with Reheat How it works

VAV boxes with reheat are similar to a shutoff box, with the
addition of a heat source. The heat source is typically located at the
box's outlet and can be hot water or electric. The air damper inside
From To
AHU Space the VAV box typically has an adjustable minimum flow setting to
ensure sufficient airflow to a zone in the heating operation mode.
Common applications
They are typically used when system-first cost is a primary
consideration and heat is required during occupied hours.

Figure 3. VAV boxes: how they work and how they are used (continued)
Parallel fan-powered VAV How it works

A parallel fan-powered VAV has an air damper similar to a shutoff
Back-Draft
Damper To box. In addition, it has a fan, backdraft damper, and a heat source.
Space
When reheat is not required, the fan is off and a back-draft damper
is closed to prevent cool air from entering the return plenum.
When reheat is required:
• First stage—the fan pulls warm plenum air into the VAV box
through the backdraft damper where it mixes with cool primary
air
• Second stage—electric or hot water coil placed at the outlet
of the VAV box
Common applications
Using warm plenum air as the first stage of heat in the VAV box
From
may significantly reduce operating costs over electric or hot water
From Plenum AHU reheat alone.
Series fan-powered VAV How it works

The series fan operates continuously, while the damper modulates
to vary the ratio of warm plenum air to cool supply air. The result
To
is a constant volume of variable temperature air flowing into the
Space
From space. Additional reheat may also be available from a heating coil
AHU located at the VAV box outlet.
Common applications
Series fan-powered VAV boxes are often selected by designers
who wish to take advantage of the unique characteristics of
constant air delivery to the zone, while still benefiting from the
energy savings associated with a VAV system. Series fan-powered
VAV boxes may be used throughout the entire building or they may
From Plenum be applied selectively in areas such as restrooms, entrance ways,
and hallways, where it is desirable to maintain a constant airflow
regardless of load.
Diffusers
Diffusers are typically located in the ceiling, above the occupied spaces, and downstream (in the
airflow path) of the VAV boxes.

Building Automation System (BAS)

A BAS is the control system used in a building or group of buildings to coordinate operation of the
HVAC equipment, monitor alarms, trend data, and allow technicians and building owners to
manage schedules, define spaces, and control space temperature. The Tracer SC BAS is typically
composed of:
• Tracer SC—The Tracer™ SC system controller acts as the central coordinator for all individual
equipment devices on a Tracer building automation system. The Web-based interface of the
Tracer SC system controller provides an easy and convenient way for building operators to
access their building automation system. Access is available from any personal computer with
access to the Tracer SC network, even from remote locations.
• Rover service tool—The Rover™ service tool is used to configure, monitor, and test Trane
unit-level controllers that communicate using the LonTalk protocol.
• Tracer TU service tool—The Tracer TU service tool is used to configure, monitor, test, and
program the Trane system and unit-level controllers using BACnet, USB, and Ethernet. It is also
used to program TGP2 in Tracer SC.
Although chillers and boilers are often controlled by a Tracer SC BAS, they are usually not
considered part of a VAV air system, and they are not discussed in this applications guide.
Tracer SC Variable-Air-Volume Air System Benefits

The Tracer SC Scheduling, Area, and VAS application software coordinates air-handling units and
VAV boxes within a building and provides:
• Efficient space comfort control
• Cost-effective ventilation control
• Cost-effective duct static pressure control
• The ability to schedule Start, Stop, Optimal Start, Optimal Stop, Humidity Pulldown, and Night
Economize actions for each Area of the building
• Applications to help you minimize energy costs (humidity control, economizing decisions,
Optimal Start and Optimal Stop, etc.)
• Useful information about the occupant spaces and the air handling equipment (application
status pages and standard reports)
• A means by which a building owner can create, manage, and bill multiple tenants
• Easy setup, commissioning, and troubleshooting tools (Rover service tool, Tracer TU service
tool, VAS Auto-commissioning, etc.)

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Inst
Insta
stal
stalll
al
BAS Technician(s)

Maintain
Design Considerations
This section provides information to consider while designing a project that contains a VAV air
system. Choosing the right equipment is the most important element in designing a VAV air
system. Choosing the wrong equipment can add substantial cost and setup time to the project.
Air Handling Unit (AHU)

Consider the following information when selecting an air handler for the project:
Choose an AHU that can sense and control the duct static pressure. A single static
pressure sensor is located at the fan outlet. A static pressure controller adjusts the variable
frequency drive to maintain the duct static pressure at a fixed (design) or variable (optimized)
setpoint.
Use a variable setpoint that is based on the position of the VAV terminal dampers (refer to “Duct
Best Static Pressure Optimization,” p. 157).
Practice
Choose an AHU that can control its discharge air temperature while cooling. Air
handlers in a Tracer SC VAS should be able to control their discharge air temperature while cooling.
Trane AHUs do this, although some (IntelliPak™ and ReliaTel™) do not control their discharge air
temperature during certain heating scenarios. If using non-Trane air handlers, make sure they can
control the discharge air temperature while cooling.

Climate Changers need to be ordered with an MP580 controller (refer to Table 1), which is a native
LonTalk controller. Order IntelliPaks, Commercial Self-Contained, and Commercial Voyagers with
a LonTalk Communication Interface (LCI) card, not a Tracer Communication Interface (TCI).
Table 1. Equipment and controller pairings
Equipment Controller
M-series Climate Changer Tracer MP580
T-series Climate Changer Tracer MP580
Custom Climate Changer Tracer MP580
Commercial Voyager RTUs LCI-R, BCI-R*
IntelliPak rooftop units (RTUs)

LCI-I, BCI-I
Commercial Self-contained units
100% outdoor air unit Tracer MP581, UC400, UC600**
Non-Trane air handler Tracer MP581, UC400, UC600**

*Scheduled for 2010 release.
**UC600 is scheduled for 2011 release.
Line voltage power is required for the Tracer MP581. If possible, the electrical contractor
should bring line voltage power to the AHU controller to power the control transformer. However,
if that is not possible, allocate enough time and material to run the line voltage power to the
controller. Work with the consulting engineer to ensure that the electrical prints show power
coming to the AHU controller. Know the voltage of this power source to order the correct step-down
(to 24 Vac) transformer with the Tracer MP581.
Limit each AHU controller to controlling only one AHU

Best
Practice This may only apply to the MP580/EX2. Reasons to avoid using the MP580/EX2 to control
multiple AHUs:
• It might be a violation to the job specification.
• If the MP580 fails or is being serviced, 2 or more AHUs are shut down, instead of one.
• Wiring costs increase if the AHUs are not in the same room.
• There is an increased chance of error during configuration and TGP programming (looking
at the wrong input or controlling the wrong output).
• Tracer SC uses profile variables to control MP580/581.
• Tracer SC applications to not support more than one AHU per controller.
Do not wire critical inputs and outputs to EX2 expansion modules. Instead, wire them
directly to the MP580/581 controller. If communications fail to the EX2, the control fails to the last
state. Use EX2s for ancillary points.
Do not hard-wire a space temperature sensor to the air handler. In comm loss situations,
the AHU goes into Occupied mode 15 minutes after it loses communication. If the AHU has a heat
source, and morning and/or daytime warm-up are enabled, the AHU could go into a warm-up cycle
as needed. If the VAV boxes downstream cannot communicate with the AHU to see that it is going
into a constant volume mode of operation (Max Heat), the VAV box air dampers will not drive to
max to accommodate the increased airflow. This could result in damage to the duct system.

Are airflow measurement stations required? If the design engineer has specified ventilation
airflow requirements for the VAV boxes, an airflow measurement station at the AHU may be
necessary to measure and control the amount of outdoor air being brought into the system.
• Order Traq™ dampers with the IntelliPak and Climate Changer.
Note: If using a Climate Changer for a 100% outdoor air unit in a dedicated ventilation system,
Traq dampers may not be necessary.
• Traq dampers on Self-Contained units are only offered on 20 to 80 ton water-cooled units with
air-side economizers. Instead of using Traq dampers to measure the amount of outdoor air
delivered to your CSC (or if you have a water-side economizer with your CSC), use a VAV box
(if the building design allows for it). The VAV box in this case is part of a dedicated ventilation
system (refer to “Dedicated Ventilation Systems,” p. 181).
Note: Depending on the amount of ventilation air required, or if the space the CSC serves has
more than one Area, more than one VAV box may be needed.
• Although Traq dampers are not offered on the VAV Commercial Voyager, the unit has a function
called OA CFM Compensation Control, which modifies the OA damper minimum position
based on the reported unit airflow.
Note: OA Flow Compensation control is NOT compatible with ventilation optimization. Refer
to the guide on ReliaTel Microprocessor Controls, RT-SVD03C-EN, for additional
details on OA CFM Compensation.
When required to report AHU supply fan airflow, a suitable substitution may be the summation
of all VAV box airflows.
VAV Boxes
Consider the following information when selecting VAV boxes for the project:
Order a zone sensor with the VAV box. •
• If it is necessary to initiate or cancel Timed Override from a zone sensor, order a sensor with
an ON button or ON/CANCEL buttons.
• If a communication stub is wired to the space sensor, order a space sensor with a
communication jack.
• If using wireless zone sensors, order the VAV box with a factory-mounted wireless receiver to
avoid field installation
Note: Do not order a zone sensor for VAV boxes that are configured for Flow Tracking or
Ventilation Flow Control because they do not use the sensor. Refer to “Special
Applications,” p. 181 for more information.
Order a LonTalk DDC controller (Tracer VV550/551) or UC400 controller with the VAV
box. The Tracer SC VAS has several features designed around Trane controllers. These features
include ventilation optimization, CO2 demand-controlled ventilation, and auto-commissioning,
which significantly enhances the VAV air system.
Order an auxiliary temperature sensor with any fan-powered VAV box (VSxx, VPxx) or
any single-duct VAV box with reheat (VCWF, VCEF). (Specify that it be installed in the
discharge air stream). This sensor is crucial for monitoring performance and for
troubleshooting. It is installed by the controls electrician (so budget accordingly) in the discharge
air stream of the VAV box and is used for the controller auto-commissioning sequence.
Note: When a VAV box is used only for ventilation (as is found in a dedicated ventilation system,
for example), in northern climates, order electric or hot water reheat with the VAV box if the
AHU supplying that outdoor air has limited or no reheat capabilities. An auxiliary
temperature sensor is required for VAV boxes that have reheat and are configured for
Ventilation Flow Control.
Is an occupancy sensor necessary? If the sequence of operation calls for occupied stand-by
operation (using alternate temperature and airflow setpoints during occupied hours if the zone is
vacant), purchase an occupancy sensor (dry contacts only) for that VAV box. The controls
electrician installs this sensor, so budget accordingly.
Is CO2 level monitoring required? When using Tracer UC400 controllers on VAV boxes, the
controller has a CO2 sensor terminal on the board; however, the Tracer VV550/551 does not support
a hardwired input for CO2; only communicated values are accepted. If it is necessary to monitor
or control the amount of CO2 in the space served by the VAV box (a CO2-based demand-controlled
ventilation zone application), purchase a CO2 sensor. The controls electrician installs this sensor,
so budget accordingly.
For VV550/551 only.

Best Buy a non-communicating sensor. Wire a non-communicating sensor to an MP580 (main board
Practice
or EX2), then create a TGP2 program in the Tracer SC that reads the CO2 sensor value from the
MP580/581 and writes the value to the VAV box Space CO2 Concentration BAS point. The sensor
value must represent CO2 in parts per million (ppm). The voltage or current input to the MP580/
EX2 must have the appropriate multiplier and offset applied to it to represent CO2 in ppm.
On systems that require CO2-based demand controlled ventilation, avoid having to provide a
Best CO2 sensor in every zone. Work with the design engineer so CO2 sensors only get specified in
Practice those zones (conference rooms, for example) that can be densely occupied but experience
widely varying patterns of occupancy.
Do not use hot water heat in Ventilation Flow Control (VFC) boxes on a dedicated
ventilation VAS. There is no freeze protection for VAV boxes with hot water heat when they are
used as VFC boxes in a dedicated ventilation system. Instead, use shutoff VAV boxes or electric
reheat VAV boxes as the VFC box. Refer to “Dedicated Ventilation Systems,” p. 181 for more
information.
For single-duct VAV terminal units (VCCF, VCWF). Often, the customer’s design engineer or
architect will not bring 120 Vac power to the VAV box if the box does not have a fan (series or
parallel) or electric reheat. The cost to bring 24 Vac to the VAV boxes by centrally mounting a
transformer and then running 24 Vac to each VAV box after the fact will be much more expensive
if the design engineer does not specify 120 Vac power initially. Be sure to incorporate the
appropriate costs in the estimate for supplying power to VAV boxes without fans or reheat that still
require power.
Important: Do not order a factory-mounted transformer with single-duct terminal units (VCCF,
VCWF). If the factory-mounted transformer is ordered, it may not get used because
it is too expensive to have the electrical contractor bring 120 Vac to the box (the 120
Vac would likely need to be in conduit).
If power is needed at the box, have the electrical contractor use a 100 VA Class 2 120/24 Vac
Best transformer and daisy chain the 24 Vac to a maximum of three boxes. If there is a VAV box nearby
Practice with a fan or electric heat it may also be possible to tap power from its factory-mounted 50 VA
120/24 Vac transformer.
The Trane project engineer should specify the airflow setpoints for each VAV box.
There are many airflow setpoints to address, such as heating and cooling airflow setpoints for
minimum, maximum, and standby airflow. A flow settings worksheet is included in Appendix A of
this guide to assist with this task (refer to “Appendix A: Controller Flow Settings Worksheet,”
p. 239). Use the schedule of VAV boxes obtained from the customer’s engineer or architect to

specify the flow settings for each VAV box on the worksheet. The installing technician and BAS
technician will use this worksheet to set up the VV550/551 controllers and Tracer SC.
Considerations related to the VV551 Retrofit Kit

Reversing the action of the damper actuator. Normally, the actuator turns the jack shaft in a
counter-clockwise rotation to open the damper. If the jack shaft protrudes from the side of the box
that requires a clock-wise rotation to open the damper, the actuator will turn the damper the wrong
way. Instead of opening, the damper hits a stop that prevents it from moving. To reverse the action
of the actuator, do one of the following:
• Reverse the two wires connected to the actuator. Belimo actuators have a retrofit kit that
permits you to reverse the terminals. For Trane actuators, you must cut and splice the wires.
• Change the software configuration for the VV551 using the Rover service tool (Configuration
> Other). This requires Rover service tool version 7.0, and VV550/551 software version
1.04.0004 or later.
Power. Find out if there is a source of power (24 Vac) already at the VAV box on which you are
installing the retrofit kit, and provide it if necessary. Typically, when retrofitting pneumatic boxes,
except for rare DDC boxes, there will not be power at the box
If you have to bring power to the box, have the electrical contractor use a 100 VA Class 2 120/
Best 24 Vac transformer and daisy chain the 24 Vac to a maximum of three boxes. If there is a VAV
Practice box nearby with a fan or electric heat it may also be possible to tap power from its factory-
mounted 50 VA 120/24 Vac transformer.
Tracer SC Sizing
The Tracer SC can support up to 120 total devices, including any combination of devices on the two
BACnet MSTP links and the LonTalk link. Currently the Tracer SC can support up to 30 devices on
each of the BACnet MSTP links and 120 devices on the LonTalk link. LonTalk links with more than
60 devices require a repeater, which may include devices other than those associated with the VAV
control system.
Note: If there are MP580/581 devices on the LonTalk link, the total number of devices cannot
exceed 70 (MP580/581s + LonTalk devices).
LonTalk Wiring Guidelines

For detailed information on wiring unit controllers in a Tracer SC system, refer to the most recent
version of BAS-SVN03-EN, Unit Controller Wiring for the Tracer SC System Controller.
Refer to “Installation,” p. 26 for more detailed information on communication, power, and signal
wiring.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Inst
Insta
stal
stalll
al
BAS Technician(s)

Maintain
Sequence of Operation
This section contains text that can be copied and pasted into submittals (or guide specifications).
Use the text as is to ensure there will be no question that Trane equipment will be able to function
according to the requirements. Keep in mind that submittals are for equipment such as AHUs and
VAV boxes and not control systems. The goal is that the person reading the submittal has an
increased understanding of Trane equipment and how it operates.
How VAV Boxes Work

The following sections describe the operation of single-duct, parallel fan powered, and series fan
powered Variable Air Volume (VAV) terminal units with Direct Digital Controls (DDC). In each case,
VAV terminal units can support the following control schemes:
Space temperature control (with or without a fan, with or without reheat)
• Occupied with cold or hot primary air
• Unoccupied with cold or hot primary air
Flow tracking (without fan, without reheat)
Ventilation flow control (without fan, with or without local reheat)
Note: Cold primary air is primary air that is colder than the VAV box configured auto changeover
setpoint, minus 10°F (°C).
Hot primary air is primary air that is hotter then the VAV box configured auto changeover
setpoint.

Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units

Single-Duct VAV Terminals, Cooling Only
Space Temperature Control
• Occupied, primary air is cold
As the space temperature rises above the occupied cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall
modulate open to its maximum cfm. As the space temperature falls below the occupied cooling
setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its minimum cfm.
• Occupied, primary air is hot
As the space temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall
modulate open to its maximum heating cfm. As the space temperature rises above the
occupied heating setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its minimum heating cfm. If the unit
knows the air handler is running in the constant volume mode during occupied heating, the unit
shall open its air valve to it maximum heating cfm.
• Unoccupied, primary air is hot
As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall open to
provide maximum heating cfm. As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating
setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve. If the unit knows the air handler is running in the
constant volume mode during unoccupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its
maximum heating cfm.
• Unoccupied, primary air is cold
On a rise in space temperature above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit
shall open to provide maximum cfm. As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied
cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve.
Flow Tracking
• Occupied and Unoccupied operating modes are not supported. Flow tracking VAVs always
follow the communicated airflow setpoint plus the configured offset.
Ventilation Flow Control

• Occupied, primary air is cold or hot
Control the airflow to the communicated ventilation setpoint.
• Unoccupied, primary air is cold or hot
Air valve is closed.
Single-Duct VAV Terminals with Reheat

As the space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate
open to its maximum cooling cfm setpoint. As the space temperature falls below the cooling
setpoint, the unit shall modulate to its minimum cooling cfm setpoint. As the space temperature
falls below the heating setpoint, the unit shall turn on the reheat and modulate to its minimum
local heating cfm. Refer to the reheat section below for more reheat details. As the space
temperature rises above the heating setpoint, the reheat is turned off and the air valve
modulates closed to its minimum cooling cfm.


modulate open to its maximum heating cfm and bring on the reheat. If the primary air is hotter
than the configured reheat enable setpoint the reheat shall be turned off. As the space
temperature rises above the occupied heating setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its
minimum heating cfm. The reheat shall be turned off. If the unit knows the air handler is running
in the constant volume mode during occupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its
maximum heating cfm.
As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall open to
provide maximum heating cfm and turn on the reheat at 100%. If the primary air is hotter than
the configured reheat enable setpoint the reheat shall be turned off. As the space temperature
rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve and turn off the
reheat. If the unit knows the air handler is running in the constant volume mode during
unoccupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its maximum heating cfm.
shall open to its maximum cfm. The reheat shall be off. As the space temperature falls below
the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve. The reheat shall be off. As
the space temperature continues to fall below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall
open to its configured local heating minimum cfm and turn on the reheat at 100%. As the space
temperature rises above the unoccupied heat setpoint, the reheat turns off and the air valve
closes.
Flow Tracking (does not support reheat)

Ventilation Flow Control (with reheat)
• Occupied, primary air is cold or hot
Control the airflow to the communicated ventilation setpoint. Control the reheat to keep the
discharge air temperature at the discharge air temperature setpoint over a 30 minute average.
• Unoccupied, primary air is cold or hot
Air valve is closed and the reheat is off.
Reheat Options
Choose the appropriate reheat paragraph for the kind of reheat present in the box.
• Staged Electric—Stage on up to 3 stages of electric heat with a 1 degree interval per stage
as the space temperature falls below the heat setpoint. Stage off the electric heat stages as the
space temperature rises 0.5 degrees above the turn on point.
• Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)—The first, second, and third stage of heating shall be
energized based on time and temperature deviation below the heat setpoint. The heat stages
will be brought on in order, and duty cycled one at a time, to meet the desired heating capacity.
The stages will be duty cycled on a 3 minute period. Desired heating capacity will be distributed
equally among all heat stages that are present.
• Two-Position Hot Water—Open the two-position valve as the space temperature falls below
heating setpoint. Close the valve as the space temperature rises more than 0.5 degrees above
the heating setpoint.
• Proportional Hot Water—The position of the hot water valve is based on time and
temperature deviation below the heat setpoint.

Parallel Fan-Powered Terminal Units

Parallel Fan-Powered VAV Box with No Reheat
Intermittent Fan Control—On a rise in space temperature above the cooling setpoint, the VAV
terminal unit shall modulate open to its maximum cfm. As the space temperature falls below
the cooling setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its minimum cfm. Upon a continued drop
in temperature or unit cfm, the parallel fan shall be energized. As the space temperature rises
or the unit cfm rises, the parallel fan will be turned off.
modulate open to its maximum heating cfm. The parallel fan shall be off. As the space
minimum heating cfm. The parallel fan shall be turned off. If the unit knows the air handler is
running in the constant volume mode during occupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve
to its maximum heating cfm.
As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint the unit shall open to its
maximum heating cfm and the parallel fan stays off. As the space temperature rises above the
unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve and the parallel fan stays off. If
the air handler is running in the constant volume mode during unoccupied heating, the unit
shall open its air valve to its maximum heating cfm and the parallel fan shall stay off.
As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit
shall open the air valve to its maximum cfm. The parallel fan shall be off. As the space
temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve. The
parallel fan shall be off.
Flow Tracking (does not support parallel fan)

Ventilation Flow Control (does not support parallel fan)
Parallel Fan-Powered VAV Box with Reheat
Intermittent Fan Control—On a rise in space temperature above the cooling setpoint, the VAV
terminal unit shall modulate open to its maximum cfm. As the space temperature falls below
the cooling setpoint, the unit shall modulate to its minimum cooling cfm. Upon a continued
drop in temperature or unit cfm, the parallel fan shall be energized. As the space temperature
falls below the heating setpoint, the unit shall turn on the reheat and modulate open to its
minimum local heating cfm. Refer to the reheat section for more reheat details. As the space
temperature rises above the heating setpoint, the reheat is turned off and the air valve
modulates closed to its minimum cfm. As the space temperature continues to rise or the unit
cfm rises, the parallel fan will be turned off.
modulate open to its maximum heating cfm. The parallel fan shall turn on when the reheat turns
on. If the primary air is hotter than the configured Reheat Enable Setpoint, the reheat and the
parallel fan shall be turned off. As the space temperature rises above the occupied heating

setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its minimum heating cfm. The parallel fan shall be
turned off. The reheat shall be turned off. If the air handler is running in the constant volume
mode during occupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its maximum heating cfm. The
parallel fan and the reheat are off.
Intermittent Fan Control—As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating
setpoint the unit shall open to its maximum heating cfm. The parallel fan shall turn on when
the reheat turns on. If the primary air is hotter than the configured Reheat Enable Setpoint, the
reheat and the parallel fan shall be turned off. As the space temperature rises above the
unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve. If the air handler is running in
the constant volume mode during unoccupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its
maximum heating cfm, the parallel fan and the reheat are off.
shall open to its maximum cfm and the parallel fan is turned off. As the space temperature falls
below the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve. As the space
temperature continues to fall below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall turn on the
parallel fan and the heat at 100%. The air valve stays closed. As the space temperature rises
above the unoccupied heat setpoint, the parallel fan and the reheat turn off.
Flow Tracking (does not support reheat or parallel fan)

Ventilation Flow Control (does not support parallel fan)
Reheat Options
heating setpoint. Close the valve as the space temperature rises more than 0.5 degrees above
the heating setpoint.
Series Fan-Powered Terminal Units

Series Fan-Powered VAV Box with No Reheat
Continuous Fan Control—The series fan is always on in Occupied mode. On a rise in space
temperature above the cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate open to its
maximum cfm. As the space temperature falls below the cooling setpoint, the unit shall
modulate closed to its minimum cfm.


Continuous Fan Control—The series fan is always on in Occupied mode. As the space
temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate
open to its maximum heating cfm. As the space temperature rises above the occupied heating
setpoint, the unit shall modulate closed to its minimum heating cfm. If the air handler is running
in the constant volume mode during occupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its
maximum heating cfm and the series fan is on.
setpoint, the unit shall open to its maximum heating cfm and the series fan is on. As the space
temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve and
turn off the series fan. If the air handler is running in the constant volume mode during
unoccupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its maximum heating cfm and the series
fan is on.
Intermittent Fan Control—As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied cooling
setpoint, the unit shall open to its maximum cfm and the series fan is on. As the space
temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the air valve and
turn off the series fan.
Flow Tracking (does not support series fan)

Ventilation Flow Control (does not support series fan)
Series Fan-Powered VAV Box with Reheat
Continuous Fan Control—The series fan is always on in Occupied mode. On a rise in space
temperature above the cooling setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate to its maximum
cfm. As the space temperature falls below the cooling setpoint, the unit shall modulate to its
minimum cooling cfm. As the space temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the unit shall
turn on the reheat and modulate open to its minimum local heating cfm. Refer to the reheat
section for more reheat details. As the space temperature rises above the heating setpoint, the
reheat is turned off and the air valve modulates closed to its minimum cfm.
Continuous Fan Control—The series fan is always on in Occupied mode. As the space
temperature falls below the occupied heating setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall modulate
open to its maximum heating cfm. The reheat shall be turned on. If the primary air temperature
is hotter than the reheat enable setpoint, the reheat shall be turned off. As the space
minimum heating cfm. The reheat shall be turned off. If the air handler is running in the constant
volume mode during occupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its maximum heating
cfm, the series fan shall be on and the reheat shall be off.
setpoint the unit shall open to its maximum heating cfm and the series fan is turned on. As the
space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall close the air
valve and turn off the series fan. If the air handler is running in the constant volume mode during
unoccupied heating, the unit shall open its air valve to its maximum heating cfm, the series fan
shall be on and the reheat shall be off.


Intermittent Fan Control—On a rise in space temperature above the unoccupied cooling
setpoint, the VAV terminal unit shall open to its maximum cfm and the series fan is turned on.
As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the unit shall close the
air valve and turn off the series fan. As the space temperature continues to fall below the
unoccupied heating setpoint, the unit shall turn on the series fan and the heat at 100%. The air
valve stays closed. As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heat setpoint, the fan
and the reheat turn off.
Flow Tracking (does not support series fan or reheat)

Ventilation Flow Control (does not support series fan)
Reheat Options
the heating setpoint. Close the valve as the space temperature rises more than 0.5 degrees
above the heating setpoint.
How the Air Handler Works

The following sections describe the operation of an air handler with discharge air control. The air
handler described can perform the following functions:
• Supply fan control
• Heating control (hot water, electric heat, or gas)
• Mechanical cooling control (cold water or DX)
• Ventilation control (outdoor air)
• Economizing control (cool outdoor air)
Variable Volume Air Handling Units (VAV AHUs)

Occupied
The VAV AHUs shall modulate the air handler supply fan speed to control the duct static pressure
to the duct static pressure setpoint. If the VAV AHU does not control the duct static pressure, it shall
report Max Heat.
The VAV AHU shall open the outdoor air damper to the minimum position to ventilate the space.
The VAV AHU shall control the discharge air temperature (DAT) to the discharge air cooling
setpoint. As the DAT rises above the setpoint, the VAV AHU shall use both economizing (if possible)
and mechanical cooling to control the DAT to the setpoint. As the VAV AHU falls below the setpoint,
the VAV AHU shall reduce cooling and economizing and use heating (if necessary) to control the
DAT to the setpoint.
If the air handler has heat, it shall support daytime warm-up. As the space temperature falls below
the daytime warm-up initiate setpoint, the VAV AHU shall control the DAT to the discharge air
heating setpoint. As the space temperature rises above the daytime warm-up terminate setpoint,
the VAV AHU shall control the DAT to the discharge air cooling setpoint.
If the air handler has heat, it shall support morning warm-up. On the transition from Unoccupied
to Occupied, if the space temperature is below the morning warm-up initiate setpoint, the VAV AHU
shall control the DAT to the discharge air heating setpoint. As the space temperature rises above
the morning warm-up terminate setpoint, the VAV AHU shall control the DAT to the discharge air
cooling setpoint.
Unoccupied
As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the VAV AHU shall turn on
the supply fan and use mechanical cooling and economizing, if possible, to control the discharge
air temperature (DAT) to the discharge air cooling setpoint. The duct static pressure shall be
controlled. As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the VAV AHU
shall turn off the supply fan and the mechanical cooling and close the outdoor air damper.
As the space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the VAV AHU shall turn on
the supply fan and use heating to control the DAT to the discharge air heating setpoint. The duct
static pressure shall be controlled. As the space temperature rises above the unoccupied heating
setpoint, the VAV AHU shall turn off the supply fan and the heating.
If the VAV AHU does not control the duct static pressure, it shall report Max Heat.
How the System Works

Use the text below to include the special applications associated with Trane’s VAV Air System (VAS)
capability.
Duct Pressure Setpoint Optimization

(Refer to: ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004, Section 6.5.3.2.3)
If duct pressure optimization is enabled, the building automation system shall monitor the damper
position of all VAV terminal units in each VAS object. A critical zone is found for each VAS object.
The VAV terminal unit with the most open air valve is the critical zone for that VAS object. The
frequency of this calculation is selected in the VAS editor.
When the critical zone is more open than the high limit, the duct pressure setpoint shall be
recalculated based on the Reset Up Increment. The duct pressure setpoint is limited by the
Maximum Value.
When the critical zone is less open than the low limit, the duct pressure setpoint shall be
recalculated based on the Reset Down Increment. The duct pressure setpoint is limited by the
Minimum Value.
Minimum Outdoor Air Control

Minimum Required Outdoor Airflow Setpoint
The AHU outdoor-air damper shall be controlled to deliver required outdoor airflow at all load
conditions. The outdoor airflow setpoint shall be determined according to ASHRAE Standard 62-
2001, Equation 6-1. The actual outdoor airflow shall be sensed at the outdoor air intake.
The BAS shall include a time-of-day schedule to indicate whether a zone is normally Occupied or
Unoccupied. When the schedule indicates that the zone is normally Unoccupied, the required
outdoor airflow for the zone shall be zero. When the schedule indicates that the zone is normally
Occupied, the required outdoor airflow for the zone shall equal the design outdoor airflow (based
on design occupancy), unless the zone is equipped with an occupancy sensor and/or a carbon
dioxide (CO2) sensor.

• For those zones equipped with an occupancy sensor, the required outdoor airflow for the zone
shall be continuously determined based on whether people are present or not. When the
occupancy sensor indicates that people are present in the zone, the required outdoor airflow
shall equal the design outdoor airflow. When the occupancy sensor indicates that no people are
present in the zone, the required outdoor airflow shall equal the Occupied Standby outdoor
airflow.
• For those zones equipped with a CO2 sensor, the required outdoor airflow for the zone shall be
continuously calculated using the measured CO2 concentration as an indicator of the current
per-person ventilation rate.
The required outdoor-air fraction shall be continuously calculated for each VAV terminal zone.
Outdoor-air fraction is defined as the current required outdoor airflow for the zone divided by the
current primary airflow to the zone.
The BAS shall regularly determine the highest zone outdoor-air fraction, sum the outdoor airflow
requirements for all VAV zones, and sum the current primary airflows for all VAV zones to determine
the total system primary airflow. This information shall be used in Equation 6-1 of ASHRAE
Standard 62-2001 to calculate the minimum required outdoor airflow for the system. This
minimum outdoor airflow setpoint shall be recalculated every 15 minutes (adjustable).

Control System Des
sig
gn Engineer Electrician - Power
Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician
an(s)
Program Air/
Ai r/Wa
r/Wate
Wa terr Balance
te B Contractor

Maintain
Installation
This section contains basic installation and connection guidelines. Detailed information is located
in the ship-with documents that came with the devices. References to those documents are
provided as appropriate.
VAV Box Connections

The following items are covered:
• Zone sensors
• Discharge air sensor
• Hot water valve
• Communication wiring
• Power considerations
Air Handler Connections

Static pressure sensor installation considerations.
Assumptions
When the following equipment is referred to in this section, these assumptions apply:
• The controller is factory-mounted on all VAV boxes.
• The air valve actuator is factory-mounted on all VAV boxes.
• Fan-powered VAV boxes have their fans mounted and wired at the factory.
• Electric heat in VAV boxes is installed and wired at the factory.
• There is 24 Vac or a single-point connection that provides 24 Vac.
Overview
Figure 4, p. 27 and Figure 5, p. 28 give a summary view of the devices that are typically wired to
the VV550/551 and UC400 controllers in a VAV application and their terminations on the controllers.
Following the figures are brief descriptions of the devices, how they are used, and, if applicable,
best practices for connecting them. For detailed information on wiring specifications, terminations,
and instructions, refer to the documents shipped with the devices.

Installation
Figure 4. Typical connections for VV550/551 controllers.
Hot Water Valve/Electric Heater
Hot water - 2 position Hot water - Proportional

Electric heater staged/ Note:
Pulse width modulation (PWM) Heat 3 is defined as:
J11 - Heat 3
Fans in series or parallel fan
J11 - Heat 3 Fan J11 - Heat 3 Fan Fan
(if applicable) (if applicable) (if applicable) powered VAV boxes
J10 - 2nd Stage
Stage 3 local or remote
J9 - Heat 1 J10 - OPEN Heater
On - Off Proportional
stage heat in no fan situations
water valve J9 - CLOSE water valve J9 - 1st Stage
J8 - 24V contactors
24Vac 24Vac
24Vac
J8 - 24V J8 - 24V
Actuator wiring
AC-power wiring
24 Vac
Air valve open
24V (counter clockwise)
GND
Air valve close
24 Vac transformer
(clockwise)
HEAT 1
HEAT 2
HEAT 3
GND 24V 24V

6
5
3
4
1
2
J1 1
J10
TB1_2
TB1_1
J8
J9
Chassis ACTUATOR J1
ground
TB2_1
TB2_2
TB2_3
TB2_4
TB2_5
TB2_6
TB3_1
TB3_2
TB3_3
TB3_5
TB3_6
TB4_2
TB4_1
TOOL IN OUT J2-3

FLOW
J2-2
BI1
J2-1
ZONE GND SET AUX GND

COMM COMM COMM
Zone Sensor
11 24 Vac/Vdc
10 Ground *
9 *
8
7 Comm – *
6 Comm +
5 Heat Setpoint (HSP) *
4 SVS/Fan Mode (Mode) Primary air temperature (Supply)
3 Setpoint * or
Dry contacts
2 Signal Common (Common) Discharge air temperature
only 1 Zone Temperature (Zone Temp)
* Terminations on the zone sensor vary depending on whether it is digital or not.

(refer to the installation sheets for specific terminations).

Installation
Figure 5. Typical connections for UC400 controllers.
AI1: Space Temp

VAV Application:
Fan Type: Series or Parallel AI2: Space Temp
Fan Motor: ECM or Standard (see footnote) Setpoint
Reheat Type: Electric Reheat
AI4: Discharge Air
UI2: CO2
Temp
UI1: Relative AI5: Aux Temp
Humidity (Supply Air Temp)
Kavlico Pressure
Sensor
AO1 AO2 UI1 UI2 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5
BI4 BI5
P1 P2
BI1: Occupancy Comm. out

Input Comm. in
Zone sensor comm
120 Vac
24 Vac
IMC 24 24 24 IMC
+24
Vac Vac Vac
Vdc
XFMR BI1 BI2 BI3 LINK IMC
AO1 AO2
UI1 UI2 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5
BI4 BI5
P1 P2
UC400
LINK IMC
TX
RX
SERVICE
SERVICE TOOL
ADDRESS
0 1 0 1 0 1
9 9 9
BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 B07 B08 BO9
8
8
2
2
7
7
3
6 4 6 4 6 4
5 5 5
x100 x10 x1
CONNECT AC POWER TO THE TRIAC SUPPLY TO POWER THE TRIACS
TRIAC SUPPLY TRIAC

RELAYS
BO1 BO2 BO3 BO7 BO8 BO9
A B BO4 BO5 BO6 B A
NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C
24VAC – 240VAC
BO1: ECM Fan POWER SUPPLY
See footnote
BO4: Fan On/Off
See footnote
BO5: Stage 3 Heat
Footnote: If using a standard motorized fan, connect to the BO6: Stage 2 Heat
BO4 terminal and not BO1. If using an ECM motorized fan,
BO7: Stage 1 Heat
connect to BO1 and not BO4. For an ECM application, BO1
will be slaved to BO4 via software. Air Valve
8=Close, 9=Open

Installation
Zone Sensors
A zone sensor measures the temperature of the space served by the VAV box. A zone sensor with
an optional space setpoint input measures the temperature of the space and allows a user to
generate a request for a different setpoint at the sensor. Both sensor types have the same wire and
distance requirements, but are connected to different terminals on the VAV box controller. Three
basic types of zone sensors can be installed:
• A zone sensor (required unless the box is used for flow tracking (refer to p. 187) or ventilation
flow control (refer to p. 182))
• A zone sensor with setpoint (has a thumbwheel) (optional)
• A digital zone sensor with space temperature and setpoint (optional)
• A digital zone sensor with setpoint and On/Cancel buttons on the sensor
Note: The space setpoint thumbwheel zone sensor and the digital zone sensor are both available
with an optional communication RJ-11 jack on the board and Timed Override request and
cancel buttons.
Installing Hard-Wired Zone Sensors

Refer to Trane document 32703399, Installing the Tracer™ VV551 VAV Controller for the most recent
information on wiring zone sensors to the VV550/551 controller, and X39641064, Tracer™ UC400
Controller Installation Sheet for the most recent information on wiring zone sensors to the UC400
controller.
Use 18-22 AWG, stranded, tinned-copper, unshielded, twisted-pair wire when installing zone
Best sensors.
Practice
An RJ-11 communication jack is an option available on all zone sensors. It permits access to the
communications link and all the controllers on that link from the floor level in the space.
Installing a Digital Display Zone Sensor with Communication Stub

This digital zone sensor requires 24 Vac to operate.
Note: For wire lengths shorter than 75 feet (23 m), an 18 gage, 5 or 6 conductor cable may be used
for 24 Vac power and signal wires. For wire lengths longer than 75 feet, use 18 gage, 3
conductor cable for signal wiring (TB2). Avoid routing wires near sources of electrical noise
such as motors, fluorescent lights, LAN wiring, etc. In some high noise environments, signal
wires may require shielding.
Run power for the digital zone sensor from the VV550/551 or UC400 controller.
Best
Practice
Installing a Wireless Zone Sensor

The Wireless Zone Sensor set includes a sensor and a receiver that work together to provide the
same functions as the equivalent wired zone sensor. The receiver is wired directly to the VAV
controller and reproduces signals is receives from the wireless zone sensor.
The sensor transmits the zone temperature, all zone temperature setpoint functions, and Timed
Override Occupied (On) and Timed Override Unoccupied (Cancel) information to the receiver. Refer
to the most recent version of Trane document BAS-SVX04-EN, Wireless Zone Sensor Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance for detailed information on the wireless zone sensor and receiver.
Note: The RJ-11 communications jack is not available on the wireless zone sensor or receiver.
Installation
Installing the VAV Discharge Air Sensor

Install a discharge air temperature sensor in every VAV box.
Best
Practice
Install the VAV discharge air sensor 1-2 feet downstream of the VAV box in the discharge air duct
(refer to Figure 6). The sensor provides feedback during auto-commissioning to verify the
operation of the hot water valve, electric heat, parallel fan, and series fan. It can also be used for
troubleshooting.
Use 18-22 AWG, stranded, tinned-copper, unshielded, twisted-pair wire.

Best
Practice
Figure 6. Discharge air sensor location (VAV box with series fan is shown)
Install the VAV discharge air sensor

Fan
in the duct 1–2 feet downstream
of the VAV box
From
AHU
To
Space
From Plenum
Installing a Hot Water Valve (Local Heat and Remote Heat)

Both the VV550/551 and UC400 controllers support local and remote hot water heat (remote usually
means baseboard heat). Typical installations have either local or remote hot water heat but not
both; however, both can be supported if there is no fan installed in the VAV box. Both controllers
support two-position and modulating (3-point floating) control valves.
Use 18-22 AWG, stranded, tinned-copper, unshielded, twisted-pair wire.

Best
Practice

Installation
Communications
For detailed instructions on communication wiring, refer to latest version of Trane document
BAS-SVN03-EN, Unit Controller Wiring for Tracer SC Wiring Guide, the Tracer SC Installation guide,
or to the installation guide for the applicable building automation system.
Preliminary LonTalk Communication Link Checkout Without Power

Perform this procedure without power applied to VAV boxes to test the link for level 4
communication before the boxes are put into service:
Note: Refer to “Preliminary Checkout for LonTalk Links,” p. 141 for more information on
commissioning and troubleshooting the LonTalk communications link.
1. Install resistors at the ends of the LonTalk communication link.
2. Connect an Ohm meter to the communication link and measure the resistance. The resistance
value should be approximately 52Ω + 2Ω per 1,000 feet (305 m) of communication wiring.
3. If the reading is inaccurate, go half the distance of the communication link and break it into two
segments.
4. Measure the resistance of each segment. Each segment should read 105Ω + 2Ω per 1000 feet
(305 m). The segment that does not check out contains the wiring issue.
5. Reconnect the segments.
6. Keep dividing the distance and retesting the link until the problem is isolated.
BACnet Communication Link Checkout

To isolate problems on the BACnet link, all the devices should be powered and installed on the
Tracer SC. Refer to “Preliminary Checkout for BACnet Communication Links,” p. 144 for more
information on commissioning and troubleshooting the BACnet communications link.
Power Considerations
Establish Power to the VAV Boxes
Installing high voltage power is typically the responsibility of the electrical contractor, especially
if the VAV box is equipped with electric heat or a fan.
Important: If the VAV box is not equipped with electric heat or a fan, an alternate source of 24
Vac power is required.
Pull power from a near-by electric heat-equipped or fan-equipped VAV box, or centrally mount a
100 VA, 24 Vac step-down transformer (typically in a mechanical room for ease of access) and daisy-
chain the 24 Vac power to the VAV boxes as described in “Design Considerations,” p. 12.
Note: Refer to the most recent version of Trane document number 32703399, Installing the
Tracer™ VV551 VAV Controller for wiring best practices and information on installing and
wiring the VV551 controller.
Note: Refer to the most recent version of Trane document number X39641064, Tracer UC400
Programmable Controller Installation Sheet for information on installing and wiring the
UC400 controller.

Installation
Air Handler Connections

Static Pressure Sensor Location
Traditional Installation
Typically, the static pressure sensor is installed approximately two-thirds of the way down-stream
of the longest supply-air duct. The system is then controlled to maintain a fixed static pressure
setpoint that accounts for duct losses and represents an average supply duct static pressure (refer
to Figure 7).
Figure 7. Sensor located to report the average duct static pressure
Best practice
X
Traditional location for the

static pressure sensor
A Better Location
Implementing the fan static pressure optimization feature (refer to “Duct Static Pressure
Optimization,” p. 157) of the Tracer SC VAS allows the sensor to be located anywhere along the
length of the duct. This is possible because fan static pressure optimization resets the setpoint
based on real-time system demand.
Locate the duct static pressure sensor near the discharge of the fan in the supply duct.
Best
Practice
Benefits of installing the sensor in the recommended location:

• The sensor may already be mounted on the air handler.
• The installed cost is lower because of the shorter distance between the sensor and the
controller.
• The installations are generally more reliable because there is less chance of damage to the
wiring or pressure tubing.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commis
BAS Technician
Operate
Maintain
Controller Setup
This section contains information on the proper sequence and best practices for configuring the
components, and some considerations specific to the Tracer SC VAS, including:
• Air handler checkout and configuring the air handler controller (AH540, MP580/581, LCI-R
Voyager/Precedent, LCI-I IntelliPak, BCI-I, BCI-R1)
• Configuring the VAV box controllers
The following subsections describe equipment and controller setup performed with the Rover
service tool or at the equipment user interface.
Air Handler Configuration

LonTalk discharge air controllers (DAC) are installed into the Tracer SC as VAV air handlers. When
using MP580/581 programmable controllers, the DAC profile MUST be active.
Why Use a DAC Profile for an Air Handler on a LonTalk Link?

Using the DAC object or profile will save time and, consequently, money. The DAC has been
mapped over to the VAV AHU equipment in Tracer SC to automate tasks that previously took
significant time to set up. By using the DAC profile, Tracer SC automatically controls the occupancy,
heat/cool mode, OA damper position, OA setpoint, static pressure, and the economizer functions
of the air handler. In addition, standard equipment editors are automatically populated with data.
Note: If using an MP580/581 as the controller on the VAV air handler, enable (using the Rover
service tool) the DAC profile, then install and map the MP580/581 in Tracer SC (refer to
“Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable Volume and Constant Volume Air
Handlers,” p. 47 for detailed information).
Table 2, p. 34 includes commonly used controllers on Trane AHUs, the tools used to configure
them, and the equipment types created in Tracer SC for each.
1 Scheduled for release in 2010.

Controller Setup
Table 2. Common equipment and controller pairings

Configuration Tracer SC equipment
Equipment Controller tool type
Packaged climate changer(a) MP580/581 Rover
M-series changer(a)
T-series changer(a)
100% outdoor air units UC400, UC600(b) Tracer TU
Custom climate changers
Constant volume
Field-installed on existing air handlers
or
LCI-R Rover Variable volume air handler
Voyager and Precedent RTUs
BCI-R(c) Tracer TU
IntelliPak rooftop units (RTUs) LCI-I(d)

Local display
Commercial Self-contained units BCI-I(d)
VV550/551 Rover
VAV boxes VAV box
UC400 Tracer TU
(a) MP580/581s are sometimes used on these units.
(b) UC600 is scheduled for release in 2011.
(c) Scheduled for release in 2010.
(d) All configuration for the IntelliPak is performed via the local display, but location label and baud rate is set using the appropriate service tool.
Pre-Configuration Checkout
Before setting up the controller, perform a physical inspection of the air handler to verify that it is
installed properly. Be sure to check the following items:
• Are the door handles closed and locked?
• Are the fire dampers open?
• Are there filters installed?
• Is the fan rotating in the correct direction?
• Are the safeties in place?
• Are the shipping bolts removed?
• Are the starter fuses installed?
• Are the access panels closed?
• Did you remove the hard-wired zone sensor?
Confirming the list above is typically the responsibility of the mechanical contractor, but the startup
technician should also verify these tasks.
Discharge Air Control

Typically, the first system on a VAV AHU to be commissioned and placed into operation is the static
pressure control. The AHU fan, which is typically controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
and a duct static pressure sensor, comprises the static pressure control system. The fan modulates
to maintain the static pressure setpoint of the AHU as sensed by the duct static pressure sensor.
Static Pressure Sensor Control

Static pressure sensors can be mounted on the AHU either in the factory or in the field.
Factory-Mounted
All Trane unitary products have a static pressure sensor factory-mounted in the AHU. In most cases,
the high pressure tubing connecting the sensor to the control panel is also factory-installed and no
field installation is required. However, there are some exceptions; for instance the high pressure
side of the static pressure sensor on Commercial Self Contained (CSC) units must be field-installed

Controller Setup
to a pickup tube mounted in the discharge air plenum. Consult the equipment documentation for
more details on the static pressure installation. Before starting any AHU, make sure the static
pressure sensor and its associated tubing are present and properly installed.
Field-Mounted
Commission the static pressure sensor prior to starting the AHU. The most common field-mounted
static pressure sensors are 4-20 mA devices that read pressure from 0-5 inH20. The specific
information for the static pressure sensor being installed should be available on the device’s
product data sheet.
Verify that the VFD responds to signals before sending a start command. Once the VFD has been
checked out, start the drive in hand/manual at about 20 Hz to provide some airflow and static to the
transmitter. If the transmitter reads static pressure, release the drive to auto and verify that it is
being controlled to the static pressure setpoint.
General
Conduct a more comprehensive startup and checkout of the AHU including all temperature and
humidity sensors, as well as all damper and airflow monitors. Refer to the documentation shipped
with the air handler for more detailed information.
General LonTalk Controller Setup

Once the devices are properly installed and wired, use the Rover service tool in the passive mode
to configure any AHUs and VAV LonTalk controllers.
There may or may not be a working SC at this stage in the installation. These instructions cover
the best practices for setting up the AHU with the intention of configuring the VAS system later.
1. Connect a laptop directly to the LonTalk communication link using one of the following methods
to connect the Rover cable:
• Directly into an RJ-11 comm jack on the controller, if available, such as an MP581
• To the supplied protection module and connect to the comm link at any controller
• To a wired thermostat if it has the communication option and is wired to the LonTalk link
2. Launch the Rover service tool on the laptop (Figure 8).
Figure 8. Rover Service Tool

Controller Setup
3. Click LonTalk Configuration Only Service Tool (this is passive mode).

Note: If choosing LonTalk Service Tool (5), the Rover service tool starts in the passive mode,
but the option to choose the active mode is presented there.
Note: The Rover service tool, version 7 and later, allows you to select the discovery domain
(typically the zero-length domain) for installations managed by a non-Trane network
managers.
4. The Rover Service Tool window displays and begins to discover all the devices on the LonTalk
communication link. When finished, click on any device on the navigation tree and look at the
configuration for that device.
5. Use the Rover service tool to identify a discovered device in the navigation tree.
a. Select Device > Identify... from the main menu.
b. The Rover - Press Service Pin dialog appears. Push the service pin on the air handler
controller board. Do not hold the service pin down for longer than 15 seconds or the LonTalk
controller will revert to unconfigured.
Note: A service pin can be sent two ways. The first is to press the service pin on the main
board of the device (as described in step 5). A second way to initiate a service pin
on Trane devices wired with a thermostat containing an ON button is to hold the
ON button for 10 seconds and then release it. If the ON button option is not
installed, shorting the zone temperature thermistor for 10 seconds produces the
same result.
6. When a service pin is initiated, the device broadcasts its neuron ID on the LonTalk network.
Rover highlights the device in the navigation tree and displays the appropriate editor for the
device in the right pane.
Note: Turn off the auto identify feature in Rover as any time a service pin is received Rover
opens the plug-in for that device.
7. Change the device name (location label) for the air handler to match the naming conventions
specified below. Select Device > Rename from the menu. The device’s name becomes
editable in the navigation tree. Click outside the name field to apply the name change.
Naming Devices
It is common to have multiple air handlers on a single LonTalk communication link, so it is
important to have a naming convention that allows you to quickly and accurately identify an AHU
and the VAV boxes it serves.
Name the air handler based on the blueprint name. Using a number also helps to tie the air
Best handler and the VAV box together. This is useful when you are viewing devices in Tracer SC and
Practice when you perform air and water balancing using the Rover service tool, where devices are
sorted.
Example: You have two air handlers on the LonTalk link (one MP580 identified as AHU
1 on the blueprint and one IntelliPak rooftop unit identified as RTU 2 on the blueprint).
Name those air handlers AHU 01 MP580 and RTU 02 IPAK (refer to Table 3, p. 37).
Subsequently, name the VAV boxes served by the MP580 with base names of VAV 01
along with extensions identifying individual boxes (VAV 01-01, VAV 01-02, etc.). Base
names for VAV boxes served by the IntelliPak would be VAV 02 along with extensions
(VAV 02-01, VAV 02-02, etc.). Be sure to use a “0” to designate numbers less than 10 (e.g.,
01, 02, 03, etc.) or the items will not sort into correct numerical order if there are more than
10 devices on the link.

Controller Setup
Table 3. Best Practices for Naming Devices
AHU Name VAV Box Name

AHU 01 MP580 VAV 01-01
VAV 01-02
VAV 01-03
VAV 01-04
VAV 01-05
RTU 02 IPAK VAV 02-01
VAV 02-02
VAV 02-03
VAV 02-04
VAV 02-05
Controller Setup (LCI-R DAC)

The LCI-R comes in two configurations: constant volume (SCC) and variable air volume (DAC). You
must use the LCI-R controller with the DAC configuration for the Tracer SC VAS.
1. The initial steps for setting up this controller are the same as those for the AH540/541 controller
“General LonTalk Controller Setup,” p. 35 and “Naming Devices,” p. 36 before continuing with
step 2 below.
2. Verify that the LCI-R is a DAC controller by viewing the program ID number (Figure 9), which
should be 80 00 2A 56 0A 03 04 XX.
XX indicates the software revision of the .xif program. The XX numbers may not run
sequentially from one version to the next. However, the program ID numbers before the XX
number will always be the same for a DAC controller manufactured by Trane. The alpha-
numeric sequence “0 00 2A” in the program ID identify it as a Trane controller.
Note: The Active Group View is the first view that displays when the Rover service tool is
discovering the link. Active Group View does not mean the active tool mode of the Rover
service tool.
Figure 9. Program ID in the Active Group View
3. Select the LCI-R DAC Unit tab. (Make sure the Morning Warm-up Enable check box is selected.)
4. Select the Setpoints tab.
• Verify the Duct Static Setpoint value is correct (refer to the specifications for the project)
• The Economizer Minimum field in the IAQ Setpoints group should be at 15%. Make sure it
is not set to 0% or 100%
Note: The air balancer should specify a different Economizer Minimum value.
Controller Setup
5. Click Download to send the new configuration to the LCI-R DAC controller.
6. Click Save to save the configuration for the AHU using the device name as the configuration
file name. Configuration files have an “.rcf” extension after the file name.
Note: Create a subdirectory identifying the job name beneath the Rover/Config/ directory on
the hard drive (e.g., Rover/Config/”Job Name”/”Device Name.rcf”).
Controller Setup (IntelliPak)

Refer to “Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable Volume and Constant Volume Air
Handlers,” p. 47 for specific information on configuring the MP580/581 controller and (“Controller
Setup (BCI-I),” p. 39) for specific information on configuring a BCI-I controller.
Controller Setup (both LCI-I and BCI-I)

The LCI-I and the BCI-I controller must be configured using the operator display on the unit itself
(refer to Figure 10). Do this before performing setup for the specific controllers.
Figure 10. IntelliPak operator display
1. At the IntelliPak controller panel, press Configuration (the default password is

“+---”).
2. Press Next to navigate to the BAS Communications Module: setting. Make sure it is set to
Installed.
3. Press Setup.
4. Press Next to navigate to the Unit Control: setting. Make sure it is set to BAS Network.
5. Press Next to navigate to the VAV Control Functions: menu.
6. Press Enter.
7. Press Next to navigate to the VAV Box Max Stroke Time: setting. Make sure it is set to 0 Min
8. Press Previous to navigate back to the VAV Control Functions: menu.
9. Press Next to navigate to the Morning Warm-up: setting. Make sure it is set to Enabled.
10. Press Next to navigate to the Daytime Warm-up: setting. Make sure it is set to Enabled.

Controller Setup
Controller Setup (LCI-I)

Note: IntelliPak II may support humidification and dehumidification functions. Refer to the
IntelliPak II Rooftop, Programming Troubleshooting Guide for Commercial Single Zone
Rooftop Air Conditioner with Variable Air Volume (VAV) Controls, RT-SVP04C-EN to set up
those functions.
Note: You cannot configure the LCI-I (IntelliPak) controller with the Rover service tool.
Use these settings for an IntelliPak when it is part of a VAS:

Best • BAS Communications Module: Installed (Config menu)
Practice • Unit Control: BAS Network (Setup menu)
• Software Revision Numbers: Latest versions for all
• VAV Box Max Stroke Time: 0 Min
• Morning Warm-up: Enabled
• Daytime Warm-up: Enabled
1. Configure the LCI-I controller as described in “Controller Setup (both LCI-I and BCI-I),” p. 38
using the IntelliPak’s local display.
2. Press Next to navigate to the Software Revision Number Report: settings (the number varies
depending on the number of boards installed), confirm that the latest software versions are
loaded. If not, flash download the software revision to the latest version you have available in
the Rover service tool.
a. Make sure you have the latest Rover service pack downloaded before moving to step b
below. Downloads are available at http://tranenetlax1/GCC_Downloads/Home/Downloads/
Rover.asp, or publicly at www.trane.com, at the site select: Commercial > US > Software
Downloads > Select GCC Downloads.
b. Look in the C:\program files\Rover\images directory for the latest LCI-I image (e.g., 0003_LCI-
I_Appl_1_13_5.img).
Controller Setup (BCI-I)

To retrofit a BCI-I controller in the field:
1. Install the BCI-I controller on the IntelliPak (refer to the BACnet BCI-I Installation Guide,
RT-SVN13A-EN).
2. Configure the BCI-I controller as described in “Controller Setup (both LCI-I and BCI-I),” p. 38
using the IntelliPak local display.
3. Set the rotary address (MAC address or device ID). The rotary address is where the Tracer SC
will discover the BCI-I controller and is limited to values between 1 and 120. The address you
set should be unique on the link.
Important: If you change the MAC address (change the rotary switches) after the BCI-I is
powered up, cycle power on the BCI-I to initialize the new address.
4. Power up the BCI-I controller. The BCI-I controller communicates with the Tracer SC and self-
configures based on the configuration settings in the IntelliPak.
5. Connect Tracer TU.
6. Make sure the baud rate is set correctly.
a. Navigate to Utilities > Controller > Controller Settings. The Controller Settings tab
appears.
b. Set the baud rate to 76800 in the Protocol section.
Important: Make sure all devices on the BACnet link are set to the same baud rate.
7. Click Save to download the controller settings to the BCI-I.

Controller Setup
VAV Box Configuration

Before setting up the VAV box, perform a physical inspection to verify that it is installed properly.
Be sure to check the following items:
• The VAV box controller is powered.
• The local disconnects for any electric heat or fans are ON (energized).
• The components are wired correctly (fans, electric heat, temperature sensors, etc.).
• The tubing from the differential pressure sensor to the flow ring is connected and not damaged
(the tubing can come loose or get pinched during installation).
After the VAV boxes are properly installed and wired, set up the controller using the appropriate
service tool (Rover for VV550/551 controllers and Tracer TU for UC400 controllers). There may or
may not be a working Tracer SC at this stage in the installation; however, a working air handler is
required to set up and commission the VAV boxes. These instructions cover the best practices for
setting up the VAV boxes when you know you will also be configuring a VAS system.
VV550/551 Controller Setup

Perform the following steps to set up a VV550/551 controller:
1. Connect the laptop directly to the LonTalk communication link.
Note: Connect to the LonTalk link directly at the VV550/551 controller board through the Comm
Tool inputs (TB2-1 and TB2-2) or an RJ-11 jack, or plug into the communications jack on
any one of the zone sensor communication stubs.
2. Launch the Rover service tool and discover the LonTalk devices on the link as was done for the
air handlers (refer to “Pre-Configuration Checkout,” p. 34).
3. At this point, start moving from VAV box to VAV box making sure each box and its components
are installed correctly (testing sensors, dampers, valves, etc.) and setting them up to work
properly with the VAS, which will be created later. Select Device > Identify... from the main
menu
4. The Rover - Press Service Pin dialog displays. Go to the VV550/551 being set up and do one of
the following:
• Push the service pin on the VV550/551 board.
• If the VAV box has a zone sensor wired to it, push the ON button on the zone sensor and hold
it for 10 seconds.
• If the zone sensor is not installed, short the zone sensor inputs (TB-1 and TB-2) for 10
seconds.
5. The Rover service tool highlights the device in the navigation tree and displays the editor in the
right pane.
Note: If the node state of the LonTalk device is set to unconfigured, “unconfigured” displays
on the Rover active group screen. This does not mean that the VV550/551 is not
configured properly. It means the device does not have a network address. An address
is assigned during Tracer SC setup.
6. Change the device name (location label) for the VAV box to match the naming conventions
described for air handlers (“Naming Devices,” p. 36). Select Device > Rename from the menu.
The device’s name becomes editable in the navigation tree. Click outside the name field to apply
the name change.
7. Click Configuration.

Controller Setup
Figure 11. Rover VV550/551 Configuration editor
8. On the Setpoints tab (Figure 11), verify that the following information is correct:
• Default setpoints are the heating and cooling setpoints the VV550/551 uses as default values.
Refer to the Tracer VV550/551 VAV Controller Installation and Operation manual, CNT-
SVX17*-EN for a detailed explanation of how these setpoints are used by the controller.
• The Enable Auto Calibration check box is selected. This enables automatic calibration when
the power cycles or the operating mode changes to Unoccupied.
• The Enable Thumbwheel Setpoint and Enable Thumbwheel Star and Double Star Function
check boxes are not selected.
Note: It is possible to use the Enable Thumbwheel Star and Double Star function for air-
balancing without using the Rover air and water balancing tool, but it is easier to
use the tool, so Trane recommends using it.
9. Click the Unit tab.
a. Select Space Temperature in the Control Type group. Best practices dictate that the VV550/
551 is configured this way. If setting up a ventilation flow or a flow tracking system, refer to
“Special Applications,” p. 181 for detailed information.
b. In the Box Setup group, select the item that corresponds to the VAV box. If using a Trane F-
Style box, also select the size of the box from the drop-down list box.
c. Auto Changeover Setpoint — this setpoint determines the heat/cool action of the VAV box
based on a comparison between this setpoint and the temperature of the primary air in the
duct.
10. Click the Setup tab.
The ventilation setup fields define the Occupied and Standby Outside Air cfm setpoint
requirements for the VAV. This information is typically found on the job specification.
11. Click the Inputs tab.
Analog input 4 is configurable for a primary supply air sensor or discharge air sensor. The
best practice is to install and configure the sensor for discharge air.
12. Click the Outputs tab.
Use the Output Configuration Wizard to set up the heating options for the VV550/551.
Controller Setup
13. Click the Other tab and go to the Timers group.

a. Type 0 minutes in the Occupied Bypass Timer field. This allows the VAV box to request the
Occupied Bypass but the Tracer SC system to control the amount of time the VAS is in
Occupied Bypass mode.
b. Set Manual Override Time to 600 minutes.
c. Set the Power-up Control Wait to 300 seconds.
Figure 12. Rover Service Tool Configuration editor, Other tab
14. Click Download to send the configuration to the VV550/551.

15. Click Save to save the configuration for the box using the device name as the configuration file
name. Configuration files have an .rcf extension after the file name.
Note: Create a subdirectory identifying the job name beneath the Rover/Config/ directory on
your hard drive (e.g., Rover/Config/”Job Name”/”Device Name.rcf”
16. After configuring all devices on the link, take a screen capture of the Rover Active Group view.
This screen capture allows you to see a high-level view of the link as it existed just after you
set it up. This view provides useful information (specifically, the Program ID, Neuron ID, and
device names) should you ever have to recover or remember the settings.
a. Click the Active Group icon at the top of the navigation tree to access the Active Group View.
b. On your keyboard, hold the Alt + Print Screen (Prnt Scrn) keys down at the same time
and then release.
c. Open WordPad (this is a simple text editor that allows you to paste an image of the screen
you captured into the page and save it as a file. WordPad is a standard Windows application.
To launch WordPad, click Start > Programs > Accessories > WordPad.
d. Click somewhere in the open document and select Edit > Paste (Ctrl + V) from the main
menu.
e. The Rover Active Group view should display in the WordPad document.
17. Save the WordPad file in the same directory where each of the configuration files was saved
(the WordPad files has an “.rtf” extension).

Controller Setup
UC400 Controller Setup

Perform the following steps to set up a UC400 controller:
1. Set the rotary switches to the appropriate address prior to powering up. Valid addresses are
from 1 to 120.
• The address for each device on a single BACnet link should be unique. However, even if
Best there are two BACnet links, define unique addresses for each device (for example, do not
Practice put a device 002 on BACnet link 1 and a device 002 on BACnet link 2).
• Keep a separate record that includes the name of the VAV box, its rotary switch setting (MAC
address or device ID), and the name of the controller.
2. Connect the laptop directly to the UC400.

• Connect directly using the USB port on the device
• Connect using the comm port on the wall sensor (which is wired to the UC400 using the IMC
bus) using the Tracer TU adapter (refer to X39641115-01A, Tracer TU Comm Adapter
Installation Sheet)
• Connect using Tracer TU and the Tracer SC (to communicate with a UC400 this way, the VAV
boxes must be installed on the Tracer SC)
Note: Skip step 3 if the VAV box has a factory-installed UC400 controller.
3. Set the configuration of the VAV box (only if it is not configured at the factory). Using the Tracer
TU service tool, access the configurator via Utilities > Equipment > Configuration (refer to
Figure 13, p. 44). Configure the VAV box.
Note: If you reconfigure the VAV box using the Configurator after the VAV box has been installed
in the Tracer SC, you must delete and then reinstall the VAV box in the Tracer SC.
4. Click Save.
Important: • If you have custom programming in the controller, be sure to back up
those programs before running the configurator. The configurator will
wipe out all programming in the UC400.
• Saving the configuration wipes out any old configuration data on the
controller

Controller Setup
Figure 13. VAV box configuration
5. Select Utilities > Controller > Controller Settings. The controller settings page appears
(refer to Figure 14).
a. Change the device name for the VAV box to match the naming conventions described for air
handlers (“Naming Devices,” p. 36).
b. Set the controller units (the units selected must match the Tracer SC system units).
c. Set the baud rate; the default is 76800. All devices on the link must have the same baud rate.

Controller Setup
6. Click Save.
Figure 14. Controller Settings
7. Verify the setpoints. Select Utilities > Equipment > Setpoints to define the setpoints and
setpoint limits (refer to Figure 16).
8. Click Save.
Figure 15. Verifying setpoints

Controller Setup
9. Configure the Setup Parameters. Select Utilities > Equipment > Parameters to define the
following parameters (refer to Figure 16, p. 46).
a. Click the Ventilation tab. Set the Occupied and Standby Ventilation Setpoints.
b. If performing ventilation control based on CO2, verify the space CO2 low and high limit
setpoints.
c. Click the Airflow Setup tab. Verify all of the airflow setpoints for the VAV box (as specified).
d. Verify that all other parameters were configured properly in Step Note:.
10. Click Save.
Figure 16. Setup Parameters
11. The UC400 is now ready to be installed in the Tracer SC.

Note: Select Utilities > Equipment > Commissioning to assist with auto-commissioning
and air balancing the VAV box.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commis
BAS Technician
Operate
Maintain
Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable

Volume and Constant Volume Air Handlers
Important: Fully program the controller before installing it in Tracer SC. Changing the
programming after it is installed in Tracer SC requires that you delete and reinstall
the equipment again.
Whether is was installed in the factory or in the field, the controller must first be configured and
programmed using the appropriate service tool (Rover for MP580/581 or Tracer TU for UC400).
To see some of the most popular system and equipment configurations available from Trane, visit
the following address on Trane.com:
http://www.trane.com/Commercial/DesignAnalysis/PopularSystemConfigurations.aspx?i=2352
Use Pre-Packaged Solutions whenever possible to minimize configuration and programming

Best time.
Practice
Programming the MP580/581

This section provides the steps required to set up your MP580/581 to work properly with a Tracer
SC VAS:
1. Locate the appropriate Pre-Packaged Solution for the air handler configuration you are using
and download it.
2. Download the configuration file (.rcf) onto the MP580/581.
3. Verify that the DAC/SCC profile is enabled in the MP580/581 object using the Rover service tool
(refer to “Enabling Profiles for the MP580/581 Object,” p. 48).
Important: VAV Air Handlers
If the MP580/581 does not have the DAC profile enabled for a variable volume
air handler, it will not be available as a selectable AHU by the Tracer SC VAS.
Constant Volume Air Handlers
If the MP580/581 does not have the SCC profile enabled for a constant volume
air handler, it will not be available as a selectable AHU by Tracer SC Area.

Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable Volume and Constant Volume Air Handlers
4. Download the Pre-Packaged Solution TGP routines onto the MP580/581.

Important: You MUST use the associated graphics TGP routines in the Pre-Packaged
Solution to properly assign inputs, outputs, and setpoints to the appropriate
LonTalk network variables.
5. Discover and install an MP580/581 device using Tracer SC. Refer to “Install and Set Up the
Variable Air Volume Equipment Types,” p. 73.
Enabling Profiles for the MP580/581 Object

Be sure to enable the DAC or SCC profile on the MP580/581 controller if the equipment is a variable
volume or constant volume air handler. This allows the profile data in the MP580/581 to map
correctly to the air handler equipment in the Tracer SC (i.e., nvospacetemp maps directly to the
equipment space temperature point). Figure 17 shows the location of the DAC and SCC Profile
selection options in the Rover service tool.
Figure 17. Enabling a profile using the Rover service tool (DAC profile enabled is shown)
Enabling the appropriate profile causes the DAC or SCC tab to display in the Rover service tool
Configuration editor (Figure 18, p. 48). The tab contains the specific air handler configuration
parameters for the MP580/581.
Figure 18. DAC tab in the Rover Service Tool

Configure the Inputs/Outputs/Variables

Use the .rcf file provided with the Pre-Packaged Solution.
Best
Practice
1. Configure, the inputs, outputs, and variables needed on the MP580/581 controller. Refer to
Tracer MP580/581 Programmable Controller Programming guide, CNT-SVP01C-EN for detailed
instructions.
Note: If you are not using Pre-Packaged Solutions, use names that are meaningful, but do not
make specific reference to the air handler (i.e., use “Supply Air Temp” but not “AHU 1
Supply Air Temp”). This allows you to configure points on the first MP580/581, and save
the configuration as a template. This configuration file can be reused to configure
additional air handlers of the same type.
2. Save the configuration file.
Note: If working offline, save the configuration to your hard drive for downloading at a later
time.
3. Download the configuration file to the MP580/581 controller.
Install the MP580/581 on the Tracer SC

To install the MP580/581 on the Tracer SC (refer to “Install and Set Up the Variable Air Volume
Equipment Types,” p. 73 for more detailed information):
1. Initiate a discovery for all LonTalk devices connected to the Tracer SC.
2. From the discovered device list, select the MP580/581 and click Install.
The MP580/581 is listed in three places after it is installed on the Tracer SC.
• All MP580/581s with DAC profiles enabled will show up in the Variable Volume Air Handler list
under Equipment in the left-hand navigation bar.
• All MP580/581s with SCC profiles enabled will show up in the Constant Volume Air Handler list
under Equipment in the left-hand navigation bar.
• All MP580/581 with no profile defined will show up in the Generic list under Equipment in the
left-hand navigation bar.
When an MP580/581 device is installed, Tracer SC evaluates the configuration data in the .rcf file
and creates BACnet points on the Tracer SC to represent that configuration. Table 4, p. 49 shows
which equipment is created when an MP580/581 is installed on a Tracer SC. Table 5, p. 50 shows
the points that are created.
Important: Make sure to program the MP580/581 using the same units of measure that are being
used by the Tracer SC system units.
Table 4. Created Equipment on the Tracer SC for MP580/581
Created on SC
MP580/581 Variable Volume Constant Volume Programmable
Configuration Air Handler Air Handler Controller
SCC x
DAC x
Generic x

Table 5. Points created for Programmable MP580/581 Equipment in Tracer SC
MP580/581 Point Type Tracer SC Point Number created on SC Comments

Analog or Binary Input
Only creates points for
Universal input (1-36) (depending on point configuration Dynamic
configured inputs
in the MP580/581)
Binary Output (1-30) Binary Input Dynamic
configured inputs
Binary Output Request Tracer (1-30) Binary Output Dynamic
configured outputs
Analog Output (1-30) Analog Input Dynamic
configured outputs
Analog Output Request Tracer (1-30) Analog Output Dynamic
configured outputs
Binary Variable Local (1-120) Binary Input Dynamic
configured local variables
Binary Variable Summit: Tracer (1-30) Binary Output 30
Analog Variable Local (1-120) Analog Input Dynamic
configured local variables
Analog Variable Summit: Tracer (1-30) Analog Output 30
Important: If you change the MP580/581 point configuration, you must “replace” the device in
the Tracer SC before the new point configuration is recognized. To replace the
device:
1. Select Installation > Device from the left-hand navigation.
2. Select the device that you want to replace from the list.
3. Click actions... > replace device.

Integrating the MP580/581 Controller with Tracer SC

BACnet to LonTalk Communication
Tracer SC uses BACnet points within Tracer SCs to represent LonTalk controllers. BACnet output
points (analog, binary, and multistate) are used to send data from the Tracer SC to the LonTalk
controllers. BACnet input points (analog, binary, and multistate) in the Tracer SC are used to read
data from the LonTalk controllers. Both output and input point types are created automatically
when the device is installed in the Tracer SC.
Figure 19. BACnet to LonTalk communication
Tracer SC
Browser
Ethernet Link
SC SC SC
Equipment
AI, AO, BI, BO,

MI, MO
BACnet
LonTalk
LonTalk Communications Link
VV550/551
VV550/551
VV550/551
MP580/581 VV550/551
Controller

LonTalk Profile Network Variable Associations

Figure 20 shows the association between the data on the MP580/581 editor (Configuration page)
in Tracer SC, and the corresponding profile TGP blocks associated with the LonTalk network
variables. This is how information is communicated from Tracer SC to the MP580/581 controller.
Figure 20. Network variables associated with the MP580/581 editor
Associated TGP
Program block

Communicating Operating Mode

Tracer SC applications use the concept of operating mode when communicating control
commands to equipment. LonTalk devices do not use the operating mode concept; they pass
information back and forth using network variables. To overcome the difference, Tracer SC converts
the operating mode to occupancy commands and heating/cooling commands, which are
communicated to a LonTalk controller using the network variables nviApplicMode and
nviOccSchedule (refer to Figure 21, below, and Table 6, p. 54).
Figure 21. Operating mode to LonTalk network variable
MP580/581
Tracer SC Controller
Occupancy Request nviOccSchedule

Operating Mode TGP
Heating/Cooling Request nviApplicMode
LonTalk
Communications
Link
Table 6, p. 54 shows the relationship between the operating mode and the occupancy request and
heating cooling request for non-VAV air handlers and VAV air handlers.
The heating cooling request requires additional calculation in order to determine the behavior of
the equipment in certain operating modes.
Important: The heating cooling request calculations for all equipment (except VAV air handlers)
are made using values from the equipment:
• The Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the Space
Temperature Active is below the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS or if either
value is invalid.
• The Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the Space Temperature Active
is above or equal to the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS.
The heating cooling request calculations for all VAV air handlers are made using
values from the Tracer SC VAS:
• The Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the VAS Average
Space Temperature is below the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint or if either value is
invalid.
• The Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the VAS Average Space
Temperature is above or equal to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint.

Table 6. Operating mode relationship to Occupancy Request and Heat Cool Mode Request for MP580/581
All Equipment except VAV AHUs VAV AHU

Operating Mode Occupancy Heating Cooling Occupancy Heating Cooling
Request Request Request Request
Occupied Occupied Release Occupied Release
Unoccupied Unoccupied Release Unoccupied Off
Morning Warm-up(a) Morning Warm-up(b)

Unoccupied Heat/Cool Occupied Occupied
PreCool(a) PreCool(b)
Night Purge Occupied Night purge Occupied Night Purge

Optimal Start Occupied Occupied
Optimal Stop Standby Release Occupied Release

Unoccupied Humidify Occupied Occupied

Unoccupied Dehumidify Occupied Occupied

Humidity Pull down Occupied Occupied
(a) Heat Cool Mode Request calculations are calculated using properties from the equipment:
Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the Space Temperature Active is below the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS or if either value is
invalid.
Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the Space Temperature Active is above or equal to the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS
(b) Heat Cool Mode Request Calculations are calculated by the VAS based on the following:
Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the VAS Average Space Temperature is below the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint or if either value is
invalid.
Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the VAS Average Space Temperature is above or equal to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint
How to Translate Operating Mode to LonTalk Network Variables

To determine the corresponding values for nviApplicMode and nviOccSchedule given an operating
mode, use Table 6 and follow the steps below:
1. Locate the operating mode in column 1.
2. Determine what type of equipment you have installed.
a. For all equipment except VAV AHUs, use columns 2 and 3.
b. For all VAV AHUs, use columns 4 and 5.
3. The corresponding value of nviOccSchedule is shown in columns 2 or 4.
4. The corresponding value of nviApplicMode is shown in columns 3 or 5.
Using Tracer Variables to Control the MP580/581

The MP580/581 has 30 binary and 30 analog variables, which are mapped to the Tracer SC when
the MP580/581 is installed on the Tracer SC. The Tracer SC automatically creates 30 analog outputs
and 30 binary outputs with the names created for the 60 Tracer variables in the MP580/581.
Note: If no name is assigned to a variable in the MP580/581, then the default name for that variable
is created in the Tracer SC (e.g. Tracer Summit Analog Variable 17).
These points are found on the Configuration page of the MP580/581. To get to this page:
1. Select Equipment > Programmable or Constant Volume or Variable Volume from the left-
hand navigation list (depending on the type of MP580/581 installed).
2. Select the appropriate MP580/581 from the list.
3. Click Configure.

You can override any Tracer Variable on the MP580/581 controller from the Tracer SC MP580/581
Configuration page (refer to Figure 22, p. 55).
Figure 22. Example: Tracer SC MP580/581 Configuration page
You can also create TGP2 programs on the Tracer SC that can read any value from the system,
which in turn controls a Tracer variable on the MP580/581 (refer to Figure 23, p. 56).

Figure 23. Example of how a point controls a Tracer variable on the MP580/581
How to use an MP580/581 with Ventilation Optimization in VAS

To set up ventilation optimization, you need to send the VAS ventilation optimization outdoor
airflow setpoint to the MP580/581. Here is how to do it:
1. Use the Rover service tool to program the MP580/581 using the appropriate Pre-Packaged
Solution.
2. Install the MP580/581 on the Tracer SC.
3. Program the Area on the Tracer SC.
4. Program the VAS on the Tracer SC Create Variable Air System wizard.
a. Enable ventilation optimization on the first page.
b. Select the VAV boxes to participate in ventilation optimization on the Configure Members
page.
c. Enter a value for the startup air flow setpoint, which sets the outdoor air flow for the air
handler when it starts.
5. Open Tracer TU service tool.
6. Discover the Tracer SC.
7. Launch the TPG2 editor.
8. Create a program in the Tracer SC (refer to Figure 24) that reads the ventilation optimization air
flow setpoint from the VAS and writes the value to the MP580/581 Tracer Analog Variable that
represents the outdoor air flow setpoint.
9. Compile and download the program to the Tracer SC.
Figure 24. TGP2 program to communicate the outdoor air flow setpoint to the MP580/581

Tracer Graphical Programming (in the MP580/581 using Rover)

Best time.
Practice
If you cannot us a Pre-Packaged Solution, there are several TGP programs in the TGP\Library\AHU
- VAV Plus directory created specifically to interface with building automation systems using the
LonTalk communication protocol. The TGP programs ship with the Rover service tool software and
are saved into this directory when you install the Rover service tool. To download the latest
versions of these programs along with the service packs for the Rover service tool go to http://
tranenetlax1/GCC_Downloads/Home/Downloads/Rover.asp
These TGP programs are written specifically for VAV air handler operations (controlling the fan,
controlling the discharge air, etc.). Refer to the MP580/581 Programming Guide, CNT-SVP01C-EN
for detailed information on creating and modifying TGP.
Configure as many points as possible before modifying the TGP programs and installing the
Best MP580/581 in Tracer SC. This will allow you to work most efficiently.
Practice
The following sections give a brief description of the TGP and the logic the programs use to allow
the MP580/581 to control the air handler as a DAC object. To access these programs:
1. In the Rover service tool, click Program Editor.
2. When the TGP editor appears, select File > Open... from the menu. The Open window appears.
3. Navigate to the C:\TGP\Library\AHU - VAV Plus directory and highlight the appropriate file.
4. Click Open.
When the appropriate TGP program displays in the editor, you will see the unmapped inputs,
outputs, and variables in the editor (red text). Map these to the corresponding inputs on the
MP580/581 for each of the programs. (Refer to the MP580/581 Installation and Programming guide
for specific information on mapping inputs to a network variable.)

Pre-Packaged Solutions Sample PPS Graphics.tgp

The program shown in Figure 25 communicates status information from the MP580/581 back to
Tracer SC using LonTalk network variables (NVOs).
Figure 25. Communications.tgp

Programming the Field-Applied BACnet Unit Controllers

Important: Fully program the controller before installing it in Tracer SC. Changing the
programming after it is installed in Tracer SC requires that you delete and reinstall
the equipment again.
Whether is was installed in the factory or in the field, the controller must first be configured and
programmed using the appropriate service tool (Rover for MP580/581 or Tracer TU for UC400).

Best time.
Practice
Tracer UC400 Controller

Refer to BAS-SVP06A, UC400 Programming Guide for detailed information on programming the
UC400 controller when used for VAV applications in Tracer SC air systems. The UC400
Programming Guide describes the following:
• How the UC400 controller functions on the Tracer SC BACnet Communications Link
• How to set up the UC400 controller on the Tracer SC BACnet Communications Link (also refer
to “UC400 Controller Setup,” p. 43), including:
– Loading firmware
– Creating and commissioning hardwired points
– Converting TGP programs to TGP2 programs
– Creating custom points required by TGP2 programs
– Installing system-level programs and communicated values on the Tracer SC
– Creating UC400 templates on the Tracer SC
• Programming best practices
• Special techniques, issues, and considerations
• UC400 profile descriptions and related files
• How to use macros
• A master points list

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commis
Commissio n Building Operator
Optim
Optimiz
Maintain
VAV System Overview

Controlling a variable air volume system with Tracer SC requires coordinating three standard
applications:
• Schedules
• Area Control
• Variable Air System (VAS)
The 1st Street Office Building shown in Figure 26, p. 61 will be used to demonstrate how these
applications interact to successfully control the system.
Description: The 1st Street Office Building is equipped with 25 VAV boxes and one air handler
and controlled by Tracer SC.
The 1st Street Office Building is occupied by two tenants: AAA Moving Company (served by 10
parallel fan powered VAV boxes) and Eastside Law Offices (served by 10 parallel fan powered
VAV boxes). A common space is shared by both tenants. It is comprised of the hallways, two
conference rooms, and a mechanical room (served by 4 shutoff VAV boxes), and the bathrooms
(served by 1 parallel fan powered VAV box).
The physical layout of the building lends itself to being divided into two Tracer SC Areas and a
common space (refer to Figure 26, p. 61). For this example, the Areas are called AAA Moving and
Eastside Law Offices.
By creating a Tracer SC Area for each tenant, the building owner can create individual schedules
for each tenant and allow them each the separate ability to override the schedule when they work
outside of normal business hours.

VAV System Overview
Figure 26. Physical layout and Areas in the 1st Street Office Building
Common Spaces
By design VAV air handlers will still produce approximately 20% airflow to the system at their
minimum flow settings. To account for this, the VAS uses common space VAVs to prevent over-
pressurization of the ductwork when the central fan is delivering minimum airflow to the system.
By providing a place to put excess air, the common space VAVs allow the air handler to run when
it is asked to provide more airflow than the VAV boxes in an Area can deliver.
Example: At 4:15 PM, the Eastside Law Offices are Unoccupied (0 cfm) and the AAA Moving
Area VAV boxes are maintaining an airflow of 1975 cfm to the space. RTU-01 is operating at 22
Hz and delivering 2500 cfm (which is the minimum cfm the central fan can provide). Without
the common space VAV boxes, the excess air (525 cfm) would over-pressurize and potentially
damage the ductwork.
Common spaces do not need to be scheduled because the VAS controls the common space VAV
boxes to match the highest ranking operating mode of the non-common space VAV boxes (refer
to “How Area and VAS Interact,” p. 66). Where each tenant is defined by an Area and common
spaces are shared, the common spaces are managed by the VAS and do not have to be members
of either Area.
Important: When no clearly defined “common space” exists (i.e., a hallway, stairwell, etc.), or
there is a need for timed override of the space served by the common space VAV box,
then the common space VAV box should be a member of an Area. This is a new
feature associated with Tracer SC. Previously, Tracer Summit could not have
common space VAV boxes as members of an Area.

VAV System Overview
In Figure 26, p. 61, the two conference rooms, the bathrooms, and the hallways have been
designated as common spaces. Lobbies, hallways, rest rooms, and utility rooms are good
candidates for common space VAVs, because the excess airflow and any associated noise are less
noticeable by the tenants.
The number of VAV boxes in the smallest Area plus the number of common space VAV boxes
Best should add up to at least 20% of the total number of VAV boxes in the VAS.
Practice
Note: When selecting the VAV boxes make sure they can accommodate 20% of the total design
airflow.
Defining Areas and Selecting Area Members

The number of Areas needed and the size of those Areas will be dictated by the physical layout
(office groupings, walls, etc.) and the logical layout (different tenants, different departments, etc.)
of the building.
In the earlier example, one Tracer SC Area will be created for each of the tenants in the 1st Street
Office Building: AAA Moving and Eastside Law Offices. (Refer to “Set Up Areas,” p. 75 for detailed
information on setting up Areas).
Once the Areas are defined, the VAV boxes that will serve the respective zones need to be assigned
as Area members. For the 1st Street Office Building example, the VAV boxes would be assigned to
the Areas as defined in Table 7 and shown in Figure 27, p. 63.
Table 7. Area members

Area VAV Box #
AAA Moving 1-10
Eastside Law Offices 11-20

VAV System Overview
Figure 27. Area VAV members
Area: Area:
AAA Moving Eastside Law Offices
VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV
VAV boxes 1-10 VAV boxes 11-20
Note: In this example, common space VAV boxes cannot initiate timed overrides of the Areas and
there is no logical Area for them to be a member of, so they are not members of any Area.

VAV System Overview
Assigning the VAS Members

The VAS is a virtual representation of the physical equipment in the building (that is the air handler
and the VAV boxes)(refer to Figure 28) with the ductwork providing the airflow path.
Figure 28. 1st Street Office Building physical air system layout
The members of the VAS are the VAV air handler, all the VAV boxes served by the air handler
including the common space VAV boxes, and the exhaust fan (refer to Figure 29, p. 65).

VAV System Overview
Figure 29. AHU and VAV members in the VAS
AAA Moving VAV boxes 1-10 Eastside Law Offices VAV boxes 11-20
VAV AHU =
VAV boxes &

Exhaust Fan = RTU 01 VAS
EF
Tracer SC Application =
RTU 01 VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV
Common Space
VAV boxes 21-25
Note: There should only be one air handler as a member of the VAS.

VAV System Overview
How Area and VAS Interact

The VAV boxes that are members of both an Area and the VAS connect the two applications in
Tracer SC.
Figure 30. VAS and Area have mutual VAV members
Area: Area:
Members of both
Area and VAS
VAV AHU =
VAV boxes &

Exhaust Fan =
RTU 01 VAS
EF
Common Space
VAVs
The VAS monitors the operating mode of its member VAV boxes, which are also members of an
Area, but it does not control them. The VAS only controls its member VAV boxes that are designated
as common space VAV boxes, VAV boxes or exhaust fans designated as ventilation members, and
its member VAV AHU.
Important: In a VAS, the operating mode of common space VAV boxes are only controlled by
the VAS. The operating mode of all other VAV boxes are controlled by the Areas they
serve. If a VAV box has been designated as a common space VAV box, its operating
mode cannot be controlled by an Area.
Area and VAS coordinate and control the operating modes of their members in the sequence
described below:
1. Area(s) controls the operating mode of its VAV box members.
2. The VAS detects the change in operating mode of the VAV boxes that are members of the VAS.
3. The VAS evaluates the operating mode of each non-common space VAV box.

VAV System Overview
Table 8. VAS AHU Mode Request decision

Non-Common Space VAV Operating
Rank Mode AHU Mode Request
1 Occupied Occupied
2 Optimal Stop Optimal Stop
3 Optimal Start Optimal Start
4 Humidity Pulldown Humidity Pulldown
5 Unoccupied Heating/Cooling Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
6 Unoccupied Dehumidification Unoccupied Dehumidification
7 Unoccupied Humidification Unoccupied Humidification
8 Night Purge Night Purge
9 Unoccupied Unoccupied
4. The AHU Mode Request of the VAS is determined based on the operating mode of the VAV box
with the highest rank (lowest number)(refer to Table 8).
5. The VAS controls the AHU and common space VAV boxes to the same operating mode as
follows:
Start up (fan on)
• The VAS System Mode transitions from Off to StartupDelay.
• The operating mode of the common space VAV boxes are immediately controlled to match
the VAS “Common Space VAV Mode Request” property.
• The current value of the Startup Delay Time Remaining indicates the time left before the
System Mode transitions to On.
• The AHU operating mode does not change until after the Startup Time Delay expires. It is
then controlled to match the VAS “AHU Mode Request” property.
Shut down (fan off)
• The VAS System Mode transitions from On to ShutdownDelay.
• The operating mode of the air handler is immediately controlled to match the VAS “AHU
Mode Request” property.
• The current value of the Shutdown Delay Time Remaining indicates the time left before the
System Mode transitions to Off.
• The common space VAV boxes’ operating mode do not change until after the shutdown time
delay expires. They are then controlled to match the VAS “Common Space VAV Mode
Request” property.
Important: When multiple Areas exist, it is possible to have VAV boxes in the same VAS with
different operating modes. When this occurs, the desired AHU mode of the VAS
is determined as shown in Table 8 (Occupied having the highest rank and
Unoccupied having the lowest rank)
Example: Figure 31, p. 68 shows that AAA Moving is in the Unoccupied mode and Eastside
Law Offices is in the Unoccupied Heat/Cool mode. The VAV members of each Area are
controlled to the corresponding operating mode.
The VAS evaluates which non-common space VAV member operating mode has the highest
rank and uses that to determine its operating mode. In turn, the VAS controls the operating
mode of the common space VAV boxes to match the VAS “VAV Mode Request” property. The
AHU operating mode does not change until after the Startup Time Delay expires. It is then
controlled to match the VAS “AHU Mode Request” property.

VAV System Overview
Figure 31. Example: VAS determining operating mode
Unoccupied Unoccupied Heating/Cooling

Area: Area:
Operating mode Operating mode

of VAV boxes VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV of VAV boxes
controlled to Unoccupied controlled to
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
Unoccupied Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
Off
EF
RTU 01 VAS
VAV Mode Request =
AHU Mode Request = Unoccupied Heating/Cooling

Unoccupied Heating/Cooling VAV VAV VAV VAV VAV
RTU 01
(Fan On)
Common Space
VAVs
Note: The operating mode of the common space VAV boxes and the AHU mimic the operating
mode of the non-common space VAV boxes with the highest ranking operating mode.
How Schedule and Area Determine Operating Mode

Integrating Area control with an HVAC Schedule enables Tracer SC to control the operating mode
of the HVAC equipment based on time and temperature. This is why Areas are typically members
of Schedules. Consider the following scenario for the building we discussed earlier.
Example: The two tenants operate on the following schedule:
Table 9. 1st Street Office Building operating hours
Department Hours Days
AAA Moving 8 am to 5 pm M-F

Eastside Law Offices 6:30 am to 3:30 pm M-F
Time-Based Only
If the HVAC equipment is controlled using a schedule without an Area defined, the occupancy
of the equipment could only be controlled to Occupied between the hours of 6:30 AM and 5:00
PM and Unoccupied at all other times.

VAV System Overview
Figure 32. Scheduled occupancy (time-based only—no Area)
12 12
9 Occupied Unoccupied 3 9 Unoccupied Occupied 3
5:00 PM
6:30 AM
AM PM
Temperature-Based
By using both an HVAC Schedule (time-based) and an Area (temperature), the operating mode of
the equipment can be controlled to Optimal Start, Optimal Stop, Night Purge, and Unoccupied
Heating/Cooling in addition to Occupied and Unoccupied.
• Optimal Start allows the equipment to start in advance of normal operating hours to ensure the
space temperature is at the occupied temperature setpoint when employees arrive.
• Optimal Stop relaxes the occupied temperature setpoints up to two hours prior to the
employees leaving as an energy saving measure.
• Unoccupied Heating/Cooling allows the equipment to start during unoccupied periods when
the space temperature exceeds the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• During Unoccupied periods, Night Purge allows a warm interior space to be purged with cool,
dry outdoor air during Unoccupied hours to cool the space prior to building occupancy.
Figure 33. Temperature-based control
12 12
1:00 AM
Occupied
Night
Occupied Purge
9 3:00 AM 9 3
Unoccupied
Optimal
Stop
Optimal
Optimal
Start
Start 4:30 AM
5:00 PM
6:30 AM
AM PM
= Unoccupied heating/cooling is possible

VAV System Overview
Humidity-Based
Humidity Pulldown allows the equipment to start in advance of normal operating hours to ensure
the space humidity is at the occupied humidity setpoint when employees arrive.
Unoccupied Dehumidification allows the dehumidification members to start during unoccupied
periods when the space humidity rises above the unoccupied dehumidification setpoint.
Unoccupied Humidification allows the humidification members to start during unoccupied periods
when the space humidity falls below the unoccupied humidification setpoint.
Figure 34. Humidity-based control
12 12
Occupied
Unoccupied
Occupied
9 3 9 3
Unoccupied
Humidity
Optimal
Pulldown
Start 4:30 AM
5:00 PM
6:30 AM
AM PM
= Unoccupied dehumidification/humidification is possible

VAV System Overview
Figure 35. VAS, Area, and Schedule interaction
Schedule Schedule Time-based

Control
Area: Area: Temperature-based

and
Humidity-based Control
VAV AHU =
Flow of control
que
(Sequence) VAV boxes &
EF Exhaust Fan =
RTU 01 VAS
Common Space
VAVs
Important: Schedules and Area work together to determine the operating mode of the Area VAV
box members. Those same VAV boxes are also members of the VAS. VAS gets its
operating mode from them and controls its own VAV box members, which, in turn,
it passes to the VAV AHU member. Therefore, the Schedule and Area ultimately
determine the VAV AHU operating mode.
How Area Determines the Operating Mode of the VAV Box

Each Area automatically controls the operating mode of its VAV box members. When the Area is
Occupied or Unoccupied by a Schedule, the Area controls the operating mode of the VAV box
members to Occupied or Unoccupied respectively. The special cases are Optimal Start, Optimal
Stop, Humidity Pulldown, Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, Night Purge, Unoccupied
Dehumidification, and Unoccupied Humidification. Refer to “Standard Operating Modes,” p. 118
for more information on these modes.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commis
BAS Technician
Operate
Maintain
Tracer SC Application Setup for Variable Air Systems

This section includes:
• Installing variable volume air handlers and VAV boxes
• Setting up Areas
• Setting up the VAS
• Setting up Schedules
• Navigating through the VAS pages
• Commissioning and checkout
Tracer SC Equipment Definitions

Every controller used in the VAS must be assigned as either a VAV box or Variable Air Volume Air
Handler equipment type in Tracer SC.
Before installing devices in Tracer SC, name equipment appropriately while commissioning the
Best equipment in the facility. For equipment on a LonTalk communication link, this is the location
Practice label, and for equipment installed on a BACnet communication link this is the object name.
Add a “0” to the sequential number assigned by Tracer SC so the VAV boxes sort in the proper
order (e.g., VAV 01-01, VAV 01-02, VAV 01-03, etc.)
Adding the type of space the VAV box serves to the object name, may be useful when selecting
common space VAV boxes in the VAS or assigning VAV members to Areas.
Examples: VAV 01-01 (Room 212), VAV 01-02 (Cafeteria), etc.

Install and Set Up the Variable Air Volume Equipment Types

Follow the steps below to create and map equipment to devices on the Tracer SC.
1. Select Installation from the left-hand navigation.
2. In the Configure Basic Settings for This Tracer SC frame, click Device Discovery (Figure 36).
The Discover Devices page appears.
Figure 36. Device Discovery
3. Select the appropriate communication link to discover devices.

Note: BACnet links must be enabled under Identification and Communication > BACnet
Configuration.
4. Click start discovery (Figure 37).
Figure 37. Start Discovery

5. When the discovery status changes from “Discovery in Progress” to “Discovery Completed”,
click install devices. The Install Devices page appears.
6. Select the check box for each piece of equipment to be installed and click install selected
devices (Figure 38, p. 74). The Device Installation Complete page appears.
7. Confirm that the selected devices are installed.
Figure 38. Install Selected Devices

Set Up Areas
Areas play a vital role in VAV air systems, so it is very important they are set up correctly. Standard
operating modes that rely on Area include Optimal Start/Stop, Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, and
Night Purge. Refer to “Standard Operating Modes,” p. 118 for detailed information.
The basic steps for setting up an Area include:
1. Determine how many Areas are needed. (It is acceptable to have multiple Areas within a single
VAS. Refer to “Defining Areas and Selecting Area Members,” p. 62.)
2. Determine which VAV boxes go with which Area (refer to “Defining Areas and Selecting Area
Members,” p. 62).
3. Click create area on the Areas list page (refer to Figure 39).
Figure 39. Areas list page
4. Assign VAV boxes as Area members (“Select Members,” p. 77).

Note: Common space VAV boxes can be members of a Tracer SC Area. Making them a member
of an Area allows Area to use the VAV boxes for functions such as average temperature
calculation, timed override initiator, etc.
5. Reference temperature and humidity sensors to the Area (“Area Optimization,” p. 84).
6. Configure Area functions such as Economizing, Night Purge, and humidity control strategies.
7. Save the Area object. (“Create VAS Wizard,” p. 94).
Create Area Wizard: Determine the Areas

Create Areas
Before assigning VAV boxes to Areas, determine how the VAS will be divided. Usually, Areas are
dictated by logical divisions: floors, walls, tenants, etc. (refer to Figure 40, p. 76)
1. Name the Area (for example, “AAA moving” is used here).
2. Type a description of the Area (this is optional). Use this to help operators and technicians
determine which Area they are working on by location or the air handler serving the Area.
3. If Economizing will be used, select the Supports Economizing Decision check box. Select
the appropriate economizing decision that Area will perform under the right circumstances.

Note: The drop-down list box contains seven possible choices for the economizing decision.
When an option is selected, a description of that choice appears in the Description box
to the right.
4. If Night Purge will be used, select the Supports Night Purge check box.
5. If any of the three humidity functions will be used, select the Supports Humidity Control and
the appropriate humidity function.
6. Click next.
Important: If you do not select a check box to support the Economizing Decision, Night Purge,
or Humidity Control, the setup for these functions will not be included in the wizard.
Additionally, those functions will be disabled within the Area you are creating. They
can be enabled at a later time if desired.
Note: The reverse is also true. If a function is enabled on this page of the wizard,
you cannot disable it on the Functions page of the wizard. You must either
come back to this page of the wizard and change the check box for the
function, or wait until the wizard is complete and then turn off the function
on the Area Configuration page.
Figure 40. Create New Area - Define Area

Select Members
This page of the wizard allows you to select the equipment to be members of the Area you defined
on page one.
1. From the selection tree, click the appropriate link to view the available items of that type. When
the link is selected, all the available items of that type are presented in the available items
column. Use the check boxes to select the items you want to include in the Area as members
(refer to Figure 41, p. 77).
Important: VAV boxes, fan coil units, and water source heat pumps, appear under the spaces
link in the selection tree. Constant volume air handlers, variable volume air
handlers, and programmable controllers, appear under the equipment link in the
selection tree.
2. Click Add. The items move to the selected items column on the right.
3. Click next.
Figure 41. Create New Area - Select Members

Assign Member Types

This page of the wizard allows you to define what type of member is being added to the Area.
1. The Assign Member Types page appears with the items you selected on the previous wizard
page (Figure 42). By default, all of these members are defined as Heating/Cooling members. In
some cases, you will want to change an item from Heating/Cooling member to a Cooling,
Heating, or Ventilation member. Use the list box behind each item to change its type
designation. To change multiple items at the same time, select the check box in front of each
item and use the actions... button to change the member type designation.
2. Click next.
Important: Common space VAV boxes can be assigned as members of an Area. These VAV
boxes are still controlled by VAS. However, as members of the Area, they can
initiate Timed Overrides and are included in Area temperature calculations.
Figure 42. Assign Member Types page
Leave most members as Heating/Cooling type members. Heating only and Cooling only
Best members are typically used for testing.
Practice

Configure Members
When this page of the wizard appears (refer to Figure 43), some of the check boxes will already be
selected based on the choices you made on the first page of the wizard. For instance, if you selected
the Supports Night Purge check box on the first page, all of the members will be selected here
as night purge members. This page is dynamic and changes based on your selections earlier in the
wizard.
Note: If you do not select a check box on page one (i.e., Supports Humidity Control), none of the
associated check boxes on this page of the wizard will appear (i.e., humidify or dehumidify).
Figure 43. Configure Member page
The calculation check box indicates that the member (typically a VAV box) is included in the
calculations conducted by Area for Average Space Temperature, Average Min Space Temperature,
and Average Max Space Temperature. To exclude a member from Area calculations, deselect the
check box in this column (e.g., if a VAV box is located in a closet or utility room, it is undersized, it
may have a faulty space temperature sensor, etc., you may not want its input included in
temperature calculations for the rest of the space).
Configuration
The important task on this page of the wizard (refer to Figure 44, p. 80) is to reference the
temperature and humidity sensors for the Area. If the Area does not support humidity control
(determined by the check box on the first page of the wizard), then only the space temperature
sensor and the outdoor air temperature sensor need to be referenced.
Important: If the proper references to sensors are not set here, temperature and humidity
control strategies (i.e., Optimal Start, Optimal Stop, Night Heat/Cool, Humidity Pull-
down, etc.) will not work properly. Area will use constant values instead of the
dynamic data obtained from the sensors, which accurately reflects current
conditions.

Setup:
3. Click on the blue referencer icon ( ) behind the sensor value you want to reference.
4. The Reference window appears. Choose either the User pre-defined data source or Select
custom data source options from the Change Data Source frame.
Note: The concept of a pre-defined referencer is new in Tracer SC. The pre-defined data source
is typically the sensor or value that is used most often for the referencer. The only sensor
that does not have pre-defined referencers defined is the space humidity sensor. The
pre-defined defaults for each of the other sensors are listed below:
– Space temperature sensor = Area average space temperature (Area minimum space
temperature and maximum space temperature are also available for selection)
– Outdoor air humidity sensor = Facility outdoor air humidity
– Outdoor air temperature sensor = Facility outdoor air temperature
Use the user pre-defined data source when possible.

Best
Practice
5. Verify that the selections in the Event Notifications frame for Timed Override Class and
Diagnostics Class meet the event routing needs for the facility.
6. Click Next.
Figure 44. Configuration page

Functions
The content of the Functions page depends on the selections you made on the Define Area page
of the wizard. If you determined that the Area would support Economizing Decision, Night Purge,
and Humidity Control, this page contains setup information that is critical to the proper operation
of those functions in the Area application (Figure 45). If the Area does not support any of those
functions, the Functions page will not appear in the wizard.
Figure 45. Function page

Functions - Economizing
This is a new function for the Area application. Area now has the ability to determine when to allow
Economizing. Area then controls the Economizer Enable point to Enabled or Disabled (it does not
actually control equipment). The Night Purge function can use this economizing decision for input
on its decision to perform Night Purge.
The economizing decision is based on the type of Economizing selected on the first page of the
wizard (refer to the bulleted list below) and the setpoints entered in the Start Condition and Stop
Condition fields on this page of the wizard (referencers can be used for these values, but these are
typically constants).
A box to the right of the condition fields explains how the economizing decision is made:
• Fixed Dry Bulb — The ”Economizer Enable” point will be Enabled when the outdoor air
temperature falls below the start condition. This point will be Disabled when the outdoor air
temperature rises above the stop condition.
• Differential Dry Bulb — The ”Economizer Enable” point will be Enabled whenever the
differential between the outdoor air temperature and space temperature is below the start
condition. This point will be Disabled when the differential between the outdoor air
temperature and space temperature is below the stop condition.
• Fixed Enthalpy — The ”Economizer Enable” point will be Enabled whenever the outdoor air
enthalpy is below the start condition. This point will be Disabled when the outdoor air enthalpy
rises above the stop condition.
• Differential Enthalpy — The ”Economizer Enable” point will be Enabled whenever the
differential between the outdoor air enthalpy and space enthalpy is below the start condition.
This point will be Disabled when the differential between the outdoor air temperature and
space temperature is below the stop condition.
Important: If Area is making an economizing decision based on enthalpy, the corresponding
temperature and humidity sensors must be referenced. Area uses the space
temperature and space humidity to calculate space enthalpy; and outdoor air
temperature and outdoor air humidity to calculate the outdoor air enthalpy and
dew point.
• OA Dew Point and OA Temperature — The “Economizer Enable” point will be Enabled when
the outdoor air temperature is below the start condition and the outdoor air dew point is below
the start condition 2. This point will be Disabled when either the outdoor air temperature falls
below the stop condition or the outdoor air dew point rises above the stop condition 2.
• Referenced — The ”Economizer Enable” point will follow the referenced point status.
Example: TAn Area is being served by four rooftop units. The Area is configured to support the
Economizing Decision using Fixed Enthalpy calculations. Using a referencer, each of the rooftop
units can be configured to base its decision to economize on the condition of the Economizer
Enable point in Area.
Setup
1. Support for economizing and the type of economizing decision have already been selected on
the Define Area page of the wizard.
2. Type in a value for the Start Condition. This value will vary depending on how Area is making
its economizing decision.
3. Type in a value for the Stop Condition. This value will vary depending on how Area is making
its economizing decision.
4. Click Next.
Functions - Night Purge
The Night Purge function and its setup are described in detail in the Standard Operating Modes
section (refer to “Night Purge (Night Economizing),” p. 129). Make the appropriate changes and
click Next.

Functions - Humidity Control

The Humidity Control functions and their setup are described in detail Standard Operating Modes
section (refer to “Humidity Pull Down,” p. 125, “Unoccupied Humidification,” p. 132, and
“Unoccupied Dehumidification,” p. 133). Make the appropriate changes and click Next.
Confirmation
The confirmation page is a summary of all the settings you defined in the wizard and allows you
to verify that they are as you expected them to be (refer to Figure 46).
5. To change any of the parameters, click the previous until you come to the page of the wizard
that allows you to change the parameter.
6. To confirm the settings for the Area and close the wizard, click finish.
Figure 46. Confirmation page

Area Optimization
After completing the wizard, optimize the Area to suit the needs of the facility. This includes
defining the setpoints and offsets, Unoccupied operations, Optimal Start/Stop operation, Binary
member operation, Setpoint Differentials, and Timed Override parameters.
Viewing an Area
Once you have created an Area with the wizard, view it to confirm your settings and make
additional changes. To view all Areas created on the Tracer SC:
1. Select systems > areas from the left-hand navigation. The Area list page appears.
2. Click on the Area you just created with the wizard, or click the check box and select view from
the actions list. The Status page for the Area you selected appears.
3. There are four pages associated with Area; they are: Status, Configuration, Functions, and
Members. When first entering Area, you see the Status page.
• The Status page displays general information about the Area, such as the current
conditions in the Area (i.e., temperature, humidity, setpoints, etc.), its occupancy, what its
members are doing, what functions are enabled, data logs, alarms and diagnostics, and who
is controlling the Area
• The Configuration page displays information about the the Area setup (name, sensor
values and references, heat/cool request, etc.), the Area operation (Unoccupied operation,
Optimal Start/Stop operation, Timed Override operation, etc.), and Event Notifications
• The Functions page allows you to manage the Economizing, Night Purge, and Humidity
Control functions
• The Member page allows you to add and delete equipment and points as members of the
Area and modify their attributes
Application Defaults
Application defaults are a set of parameters that can be defined once and then used each time a
new Area or VAS are created. You can change the defaults on your system permanently if you prefer
different values than those originally created for the program. You can use the same capability to
push changes to the parameters for existing Areas and VASs in a facility.
Viewing and Changing Application Defaults
To view and change the application defaults:
1. Select installation from the left-hand navigation. The Installation page appears.
2. Within the 2. Configure Facility Settings section, click on Application Defaults. The
Application Defaults page appears.
3. The page contains three sections: Alarming, Facility Defaults for Areas (Figure 47), and Facility
Defaults for Variable Air Systems. To change any of these parameters, click edit in the
appropriate section. The parameters in the section become editable.

Figure 47. Facility Defaults for Areas
4. When finished making changes, click save.

Note: Not all of the parameters for an Area or VAS are available in the Applications Defaults.
However, many of the common setpoints, deadbands, and differentials are there. A full
set of parameters is available on the Area and VAS pages (status, configure, functions,
and members).
Updating Existing Areas or VAS with New Defaults
Tracer SC allows you to push changes to these default settings to all existing Areas or Variable Air
Systems in the facility. To update an existing Area or VAS with new defaults:
1. Click update all existing areas (or update all existing Variable Air Systems) at the bottom
of the section. A warning box appears (Figure 48).
2. Click update.
Important: When you click update, ALL existing Areas or Variable Air Systems are updated
with the new defaults.
3.
Figure 48. Update Confirmation

Area Setpoints
Setpoints are not set up in the wizard so they have to be managed after the Area wizard is complete.
Area control uses six space temperature setpoints:
• Occupied Cooling Calculated using a single space
• Occupied Heating temperature setpoint and the
• Standby Cooling (used for Optimal Stop) occupied and standby offsets
• Standby Heating (used for Optimal Stop)
• Unoccupied Cooling
• Unoccupied Heating
Tracer SC calculates the Occupied and Standby Heating/Cooling setpoints using a single space
temperature setpoint with offsets. The operator has five values they need to define (refer to
Figure 49, p. 87) to make this strategy work properly, they are: Space Temperature Setpoint,
Standby Offset, Occupied Offset, Unoccupied Cooling, and Unoccupied Heating. The unoccupied
setpoints are not calculated, they are the absolute minimum and maximum temperatures that Area
must try to achieve during unoccupied times.
Example: Area calculates the active setpoint based on the space temperature, the occupancy
of the Area, and the current heating/cooling mode of the Area. For this example the Area is
Occupied and in the Heating mode, the Space Temperature Setpoint is 72°F (22.2°C), and the
Occupied Offset is 2°F (1.1°C). So the Occupied Heating setpoint is 70°F (22.2°C).
Area calculates the Occupied Heating setpoint by subtracting the Occupied Offset from the
Space Temperature Setpoint (72°F – 2°F = 70°F)(22.2°C – 1.1°C = 21.1°C), and Occupied Cooling
setpoint by adding the Occupied Offset to the Space Temperature Setpoint (72°F + 2°F =
74°F)(22.2°C + 1.1°C = 23.3°C).
Note: The Standby Cooling and Heating setpoints work the same as described above except
that the Standby Offset is used instead.
The Unoccupied Cooling and Heating setpoints are not calculated by Area. The values typed into
the fields (refer to Figure 49, p. 87) or referenced from another source are used as the setpoints.
All the equipment in a Tracer SC system also uses this same setpoint strategy, which allows Tracer
SC to send a single space temperature setpoint from Area to the equipment and the equipment
then calculates the heating and cooling setpoints based on the offsets defined for them.
Setup
1. Select systems > areas from the left-hand navigation.
2. Click on the Area that you just created in the wizard, or the Area you want to modify.
Note: You can also click the check box in front of the Area and select view from the actions
button list.
3. Review the space temperature setpoint, offsets, and unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints
of the Area. The default values provided are adequate for most applications.
4. To change any of the setpoints or offsets, click edit.
5. The setpoint and offset values become editable (Figure 49, p. 87). After making changes, click
save.

Figure 49. Area Setpoint Status in Edit Mode
Controlling Setpoints
Figure 50 shows the three ways a setpoint can be controlled:
1. By directly entering a value in the field.
2. By overriding the setpoint directly with a static value.
3. By selecting a referencer that will control the point at the priority level of the Area.
Note: When you change the setpoint by directly entering a value in the field, you are actually
changing the default value for that setpoint.
Figure 50. Controlling Setpoints
Notice that not all the setpoints are editable directly (in this case only the Unoccupied
Heating Setpoint and the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint). The other setpoints have a
referencer ( ) or an override ( ) available. The ability to override a point is prevalent
throughout the Tracer SC system. Referencers, however, are unique to the Area
application.
Clicking on the override icon ( ) allows you to override the value of a point or an existing
point override.This is a simple override. Refer to the Tracer SC online help for an in-depth
discussion on overrides. You must have edit access to Area to perform advanced

overrides on points created by the Area application. Advanced overrides allow you to
override point values at various priority levels. To access the advanced override screen:
4. Click the override icon ( ) in the actions column to the right of the point you want to override.
The Override page appears.
5. If you have the proper access, the more options button is available at the bottom of the section.
Click more options. A more extensive Override Value section appears along with a Priority
Array section (Figure 51).
The Priority Array section shows who is currently controlling the point and a short list of what
has controlled or requested control of the point in the past. The Override Value section allows
you override the point at different priority levels. You will only be able to control a point at
priority levels defined by your user profile.
6. Set the override as required and click apply.
Figure 51 also shows the priority array and user (user, referencer, or function) trying to control the
Space Temperature Setpoint. The figure shows that the user named “Trane” tried to perform a
simple override to control the point at priority level 13. Because Area is controlling the point at a
higher priority level, user Trane had to perform an advanced override at a higher priority level than
Area to override the point to the desired temperature.
Figure 51. Overrides and priority arrays

Synchronize Setpoints
The Tracer SC allows you to quickly send the five Area default setpoints to all the members of the
Area with one action. The setpoints involved are the Space Temperature Setpoint, Standby Offset,
Occupied Offset, Unoccupied Cooling, and Unoccupied Heating setpoints. To synchronize the
setpoints:
1. Click actions... from the Status section of the Area Status page.
2. Select synchronize all from the list.
This is not a selective process at this time. Synchronizing the setpoints pushes ALL the default
setpoints (5 total) to EVERY member of the Area. If any of these setpoints has an override applied,
at the member level, the override will remain in place. However, the default of the unit will be
changed to match the synchronized value. When the override ends, the member will use the default
value synchronized during this process.
Area Configuration—Setup
Heat/Cool Request
The Heat/Cool Request for Area is typically configured as Auto. This means that Area uses the
Space Temperature Setpoint and the Occupied Cooling and Occupied Heating setpoints plus and
minus 1°F (0.56°C) to determine whether to request Cooling or Heating. Other options are to use
a referencer, or one of the other selections available in the drop-down list box.
Leave the Heat Cool Request set to Auto in the Area Configuration Setup section.
Best
Practice
Example: Area monitors the space temperature. When it rises to 1°F (0.56°C) above the Occupied
Cooling setpoint, Area requests cooling. When the space temperature falls to 1°F (0.56°C) below
the Occupied Heating setpoint, Area requests heating.
Figure 52. Area Configuration Setup
If you select the arrow on the list box, there are many options available for defining the Heat Cool
Request (Optimal Cooling, Economizing, etc.). Regardless of which is selected, Area evaluates the
option and decides which of these to implement: heating, cooling, or auto. For instance, if Optimal
Cooling is selected as the Heat Cool Request option, Area sends that request to its members during
Optimal Start; however, it is still a cooling decision. Therefore, the Area active heat/cool status is
Cooling (refer to Table 10, p. 90).

Table 10. Area response to Heating Cooling Mode Request

Heating Cooling Mode Request Area Response
Area makes Heating or cooling decision based on space
Auto
temperature and occupied cooling and heating setpoint
Heat Heating
Optimal Heating Heating
Cooling Cooling
Night Purge Cooling
Optimal Cooling Cooling
Off Auto
Test Auto
Emergency Heat Heating
Fan Only Auto
Economizing Cooling
Ice Making Auto
Max Heat Heating
Economy Auto
Dehumidify Auto
Calibrate Auto
Area Configuration—Operations
Figure 53 shows the operations that can be Enabled and Disabled in the Operations section.
Figure 53. Area Configuration Operations
Unoccupied Operations
Enable this operation if you want Area to heat or cool during unoccupied periods. If Enabled, you
can also set the differential value that defines how far below the Unoccupied Cooling setpoint the
temperature must fall before Area stops cooling, and how far above the Unoccupied Heating
setpoint the temperature must rise before Area stops heating.

Optimal Start/Stop
This allows you to Enable or Disable Outdoor Air Temperature Compensation in the Area thermal
ramp rate calculation. If Enabled, Area correlates the Optimal Start/Stop rates with the outdoor air
temperature and adjusts the start/stop times if a drastic temperature change occurs from one day
to the next.
Timed Override
If you want people in the building to be able to request a timed override, this operation must be
Enabled. Timed Override is typically initiated from a zone temperature sensor in the space, which
has an override button. This zone temperature sensor must be attached to a VAV box that is a
member of the Area and is also defined as an override member on the Member Configuration page.
You can set the duration for any overrides in this section as well. You can also use an Optional Input
to initiate timed override when there is no zone temperature sensor available. The Optional Input
is a multi-state value where 1 = TOV Auto, 2 = TOV On, 3 = TOV Cancel.
Binary Members
Binary members are non-equipment members of an Area. Therefore, Area can only control binary
outputs or binary value points On or Off.
Binary Control-Continuous Operation
If the binary control is set for Continuous, Area controls the binary output to On any time the Area
Heating/Cooling mode matches the binary member type (heating, cooling, or heating/cooling) and
the Area is in the Occupied operating mode.
Binary Control-Cycling Operation
For Cooling only binary members, Area controls the binary member to On any time the space
temperature rises above the Occupied Cooling Setpoint, the Heating/Cooling mode is Cooling, and
the Area is in the Occupied operating mode. Area controls the binary member to Off any time the
space temperature falls below the Occupied Cooling Setpoint minus the Binary Control Differential,
or the Area Heating/Cooling mode transitions to Heating, or the Area operating mode transitions
to Unoccupied (refer to Figure 54).
Example: An exhaust fan in a warehouse is used to vent hot air during the summer.
For Heating only binary members, Area controls the binary member to On any time the Area space
temperature falls below the Occupied Heating Setpoint, the Heating/Cooling mode is Heating, and
the Area is in the Occupied operating mode. Area controls the binary member to Off any time the
space temperature rises above the Occupied Heating Setpoint plus the Binary Control Differential,
or the Area Heating/Cooling mode transitions to Cooling, or the Area operating mode transitions
to Unoccupied (refer to Figure 55, p. 92).
Example: An unit heater in a warehouse is used to heat a space during the winter.
Heating/Cooling binary members operate as a composite of both the heating only and cooling only
operation (refer to Figure 56, p. 93)
Example: A third-party air handler is part of the system where Tracer SC only controls the Start/
Stop status.

Figure 54. Cycling operation (with differential) for a binary cooling-only member
Figure 55. Cycling operation (with differential) for a binary heating-only member

Figure 56. Cycling operation (with differential) for a binary heating/cooling member

Occupied Setpoint Differential

You can only Enable or Disable this operation. If Enabled, an additional rule on the Setpoint
Validation page is enforced. This rule follows ASHRAE standard 90.1, which states that half of the
differential between the Occupied Heating and Cooling setpoints is the value of the Occupied
Offset. So the Occupied Offset value can never be less than half the value of the Occupied Setpoint
Differential if this function is enabled.
Create VAS Wizard

Creating a new VAS using the wizard requires fewer decisions than creating a new Area. In a
variable air system, all of the VAV boxes connected to an air handler are members of the VAS. A
VAS can only contain one air handler as a member. Tracer SC now allows for control of ventilation
members as part of the VAS.
Create a VAS
Before creating a VAS, determine whether the VAS you create needs to support any optimization
strategies (i.e., duct static pressure optimization or ventilation optimization).
1. To create a new VAS, select Systems > VAS from the left-hand navigation, then click on +
create variable air system on the list page (Figure 57).
2. The Create Variable Air System wizard launches.
Figure 57. VAS list page (no members)
Define VAS Configuration

1. Name the VAS (we’ll use “RTU-01 VAS” as an example)(Figure 58).
2. Type a description of the VAS (this is optional). Use this to help operators and technicians
determine which VAS they are working on by location or the Areas being served by the VAS.

3. There are also three check boxes and three editable fields in the Configuration Settings group.
Trane recommends leaving these in their default settings. These are available after the VAS is
created if you need to make changes.
Leave the check boxes selected for Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night, Send source
Best temperature to VAV boxes, and Send drive max to VAV boxes.
Practice
4. If you are implementing Duct Static Pressure Optimization, select the Duct Static Pressure
Optimization check box in the Optimization Support section.
5. If you are implementing Ventilation Optimization, select the Ventilation Optimization check
box in the Optimization Support section.
6. Click Next.
Important: Ventilation Optimization requires that the air handler is equipped with Traq
dampers or outdoor air flow sensors.
Important: When commissioning VAV boxes, define the outdoor air requirements for each
VAV box using the Rover service tool or Tracer TU. You can see the values for
outdoor air requirements from Tracer SC, but they are not editable, so this must
be configured at the VAV box. The calculated values for each VAV box are
available on the schedule from the Design Engineer.
Figure 58. VAS wizard: Define the VAS Configuration

Allow VAVs to Use Auxiliary Heat at Night

When the Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night check box is checked, VAV boxes have full
control over their auxiliary heat at night.
Unchecking this check box (Figure 58, p. 95) allows the VAS to disable aux heat when the VAS
requests that the AHU be in one of these modes:
• Unoccupied
• Optimal Start
• Night Purge
• or Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
Uncheck the Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night check box when:
Best • there is a heat source in the AHU and no local heat source in the VAV boxes, or
Practice • the local heat source isn't being used
Air Handler Startup Delay

The VAS delays controlling the Operating Mode of the AHU member for the duration of the Air
Handler Startup Delay. This delay allows the common space VAVs time to open their dampers
preventing over-pressurization of the ductwork.
Use the default setting (2 minutes) unless the drive times of the VAV boxes exceeds 90 seconds.
Best If the drive times of the VAV boxes are more than 90 seconds, increase the AHU Startup Delay
Practice time.
VAV Box Shutdown Delay

When the Operating Mode of the VAS changes to Unoccupied, the VAS maintains the Operating
Mode of the common space VAV boxes for the duration of the VAV Box Shutdown Delay time. This
allows the static pressure in the ductwork to dissipate before allowing the common space VAV
boxes to close their dampers.

Add Air Handlers

The Tracer SC VAS only allows variable air volume equipment to be added to a VAS as an AHU
member. To add an air handler:
Important: If adding an air handler that has an MP580/581 installed, the DAC profile must be
enabled with the Rover service tool prior to installing it on the Tracer SC.
1. Navigate to variable volume in the selection tree (Figure 59).
2. Select the appropriate air handler from the available item list.
3. Click add >.
4. Click Next.
Figure 59. VAS wizard: Add an AHU

Add VAV Boxes

Only VAV boxes may be added to the VAS as VAV members. A VAV box can be a VAV member of
only one VAS. However, a VAV box, which is a VAV member of one VAS, may also be a ventilation
member of another VAS in certain circumstances (refer to “Dedicated Ventilation Systems,” p. 181).
To add VAV boxes:
Important: Add all VAV boxes (including common space VAV boxes) served by the air handler
to the VAS as VAV members.
1. Navigate to VAV boxes in the selection tree (Figure 60).
2. Select the appropriate VAV boxes from the available item list.
3. Click add >.
4. Click Next.
Figure 60. VAS wizard: Add VAV boxes

Configure VAV Boxes

After selecting the VAV boxes, the wizard allows you to configure them. This page is dynamic based
on your selections earlier in the wizard, so if you did not select the Supports Duct Static
Pressure Optimization or Supports Ventilation Optimization check boxes, those columns
will not be available here.
When the calculation check box is selected, the member will be included when VAS calculates the
averages for the minimum and maximum temperatures.
The common space check box identifies the VAV box as a common space VAV box, which means
its occupancy is controlled by the VAS and not the Area. For more information on common space
VAV boxes, refer to “Common Spaces,” p. 61.
Note: Keep in mind that number of common space VAV boxes should equal 20% of the total
number of VAV boxes in the VAS.
To configure VAV boxes:
1. Select or unselect the check boxes following each VAV box in the selection list (Figure 60).
Clicking the check box in the column head selects all the check boxes in the column.
2. Click Next.
Important: VAV boxes must be members of an Area for the VAS to see mode changes. VAS
monitors the mode of the VAV boxes and uses that information to change and
control the air handler.
Figure 61. VAS wizard: Configure Members

Add Ventilation Members

A ventilation member can be a VAV box, a binary output point, or a binary value point. An exhaust
fan or a VAV box providing outdoor air to the air handler in a dedicated ventilation system are good
examples of ventilation members. Ventilation members are turned on and off based on the
operating mode of the VAS. When the VAS is in the Occupied or Optimal Stop mode, the ventilation
members are On. During all other VAS modes, the ventilation members are Off.
Important: Ventilation members are controlled by VAS at the VAS priority level.
To add Ventilation members:
1. Navigate to VAV boxes in the selection tree (VAV boxes are located under spaces). You can also
navigate to binary outputs and binary values under points to select those as ventilation
members (Figure 60, p. 98).
2. Select the appropriate VAV boxes/binary outputs/binary values from the available item list.
3. Click add >.
4. Click Next.
Figure 62. VAS wizard: Add Ventilation Members

Set Up Functions
This page of the wizard (Figure 63, p. 102) only displays if one or both of the Supports Duct Static
Pressure Optimization or Supports Ventilation Optimization check boxes are selected on the
first page of the wizard. The initial values in each section are pulled from the application defaults
(refer to “VAS Application Defaults,” p. 104). When these applications are enabled, the Tracer SC
VAS calculates an optimized static pressure setpoint and an optimized minimum outdoor airflow
setpoint.
Important: Further setup is required. Selecting the check boxes, enabling both optimization
strategies, optimizes the setpoints but does not communicate them to the air
handler. Refer to “Optimization,” p. 157 for more detailed setup information.
Duct Static Pressure Optimization
Typical values for the duct static pressure setpoints are:
• Minimum Static Setpoint: 0.75 in(H20) (186.63 Pascal)
• Startup Static Setpoint: 1.00 in(H20) (248.84 Pascal)
• Maximum Static Setpoint: 1.50 in(H20) (373.26 Pascal)
Tracer SC offers a new feature for duct static pressure optimization. In previous products, the reset
up and reset down functions had the same increment value and time interval for both directions.
Now, reset up and reset down can be set independently from each other with different time
intervals and increment values.
Ventilation Optimization
The ventilation optimization section requires only one change to allow the function to operate
properly. The Startup Airflow Setpoint is zero, which is also the default, but the value must be
changed to the design airflow value for the air handler. The air handler’s design airflow is available
on the schedule/prints from the Design Engineer.
Important: When commissioning VAV boxes, define the outdoor air requirements for each VAV
box using the Rover service tool or Tracer TU. You can see the values for outdoor air
requirements from Tracer SC, but they are not editable, so this must be configured
at the VAV box. The calculated values for each VAV box are available on the schedule
from the Design Engineer.

Figure 63. VAS wizard: Set Up Functions
Confirm Selections
The Confirm Selections page (refer to Figure 64, p. 103) allows you to see the settings you made
and to go back and make changes if necessary. The group just above the cancel, previous, and
finish buttons, shows which Tracer SC is the destination for the VAS (where it will be saved) when
you click finish.

Figure 64. VAS wizard: Confirmation

VAS Application Defaults

The application defaults for VAS are located on the same page as the application defaults for Area.
Refer to “Application Defaults,” p. 84 for detailed information on Facility Defaults for Variable Air
Systems (Figure 65).
Figure 65. Facility Defaults for VAS
Navigating Through the VAS Pages

After the VAS is set up using the wizards, as described earlier in this section, you can revisit any
of the parameters configured in the wizard by navigating to the VAS pages in the Tracer SC.
Status Page
The VAS Status page is the first page to appear and provides detailed information for the selected
VAS. Each section on this page can be collapsed or expanded to view the contents by clicking the
arrow in the left most corner.
Access
From the Variable Air Systems page click on the name of the VAS you created in the wizard, or
select a VAS from the list and then select view from the actions button.
Content
The Status page appears by default; however, you can access the following pages for the VAS by
clicking the appropriate button at the top of the Status page.
• configure — Click to open the Configuration page for this VAS
• functions — Click to open the Functions page for this VAS
• members — Click to open the Members page for this VAS
Alarms and Diagnostics Section

This section contains a table that shows unacknowledged alarms for the area. Click on an alarm
type to open the Alarm and Event log.
More values — Click to open a list containing more VAS properties and current values.

Status Section. This section shows the conditions, current value, and status of the VAS. All
values within the table can be selected to create a data log.
• actions — Click this button to create data logs for the selected values
• more values — Click to open a list containing more VAS properties and current values
Functions and Calculations Section

Functions Table
The Functions table shows features that have been selected for the VAS and whether they are
currently enabled or disabled. See the VAS Configuration and VAS Functions pages for
function definitions.
Calculations Table
The Calculations table shows the current status of the calculated values for the VAS. To create data
logs, use the check boxes to select calculations and then select log selected data from the
actions button.
Members Section
This section contains status details for air handlers, VAV Boxes, and ventilation members, each
divided into separate tables. Each table shows the name of the VAS member and related status
details.
Graph Section
This section displays data logs that were automatically generated when the VAS was initially
created.
Configuration Page
The VAS Configuration page shows the configuration settings for the selected VAS. This is an
editable page in which you can make changes to most of the current configurations. The page is
divided into two sections — Setup and Operations.
Access
Click configure from the Variable Air System Status page, the Variable Air System
Functions page, or the Variable Air System Members page.
Content
The following pages for the VAS are available from the Configuration page by clicking the
appropriate button at the top of the page.
• status — Click to open the Status page for this VAS
• functions — Click to open the Functions page for this VAS
• members — Click to open the Members page for this VAS
Setup Section
This section shows basic settings for the VAS. To make changes, enter or select a value in the
corresponding property fields.
Name — Shows the display name of the VAS.
Description — Shows a brief description of the VAS (optional).
Air Handler Startup Delay — This shows the amount of time in which the VAS will wait before
starting the air handler unit.
VAV Box Shutdown Delay — This shows the time in which the VAS waits before shutting down
common space VAV boxes after the VAS enters the unoccupied mode.

VAV AHU Startup Temperature — When the VAS operating mode transitions to Optimal Start,
Unoccupied Heating/cooling, Unoccupied Humidify, Unoccupied Dehumidify, or Humidity
Pulldown, it compares the VAS average space temperature to the AHU Startup temperature. If the
average space temperature is warmer than the startup temperature, the VAS sends PreCool to the
VAV AHU heat/cool request. If the average space temperature is below or equal to the startup
temperature, the VAS sends Morning Warm-up to the VAV AHU heat/cool request.
Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night — When unoccupied, which is typically at night, VAV
boxes use local heat to heat the space. Use the check box to enable or disable this setting.
Send source temperature to VAV boxes — Select this option to send the AHU discharge air
temperature to all VAV boxes.
Send drive max to VAV boxes — Select this option to drive all VAV boxes to maximum flow when
the AHU enters a constant volume mode.
Operations Section
This section shows the calibration and autocommissioning status for the VAS.
Calibration
This box shows the current calibration status. You can enable or disable calibration and change the
trigger value in this box. Refer to “VAV Calibration,” p. 116 for more information.
Autocommissioning
This box shows the current autocommissioning status. This is a defined operating sequence that
validates the proper operation of all inputs and outputs of VAV members. You can enable or disable
autocommissioning by clicking start/stop.
Important: cancel — Click to return to the previous page. Changes made on this page will not
be saved.
save — Click to save your changes.
Functions Page
This page shows the current functions and associated values for this VAS. To make changes, enter
new values and then click save.
Access
Click functions from the VAS Status page, the VAS Configuration page, or the VAS Members
page.
Content
The following pages for the VAS are available from the Functions page by clicking the appropriate
button at the top of the page.
• status — Click to open the Status page for this VAS.
• configure — Click to open the Configure page for this VAS.
• members — Click to open the Members page for this VAS.

This function determines the optimal duct pressure based on VAV air-valve positions. This function
reduces energy costs by ensuring that the air handler unit (AHU) is operating just enough to satisfy
the most-open air valve. In this section you can select to enable or disable this function and enter
or change values.
Currently — Shows whether this function is enabled or disabled.
Minimum value — This is the minimum operating pressure.
Startup value — The VAS uses this value if optimization is disabled and on startup.
Maximum value — This is the maximum operating pressure allowed.
Reset Table Values

Enter values in following fields to determine when to raise or lower the static pressure setpoint.
increment — The amount that the static pressure can be raised or lowered for each interval.
interval — The point at which the static pressure setpoint is re-evaluated.
maximum air valve position — If the system static pressure causes an air valve position in the
VAV boxes to exceed the maximum air value position setting, then the static press setpoint is
adjusted either up or down by the values in the increment fields.
Status
This area contains status values for this function. Click refresh to update the values.
Ventilation Optimization Section

This function calculates the system outdoor air requirement based on real time conditions in
spaces. This minimizes the amount of outdoor air that must be brought into the building. In this
section you can select to enable or disable this function and enter or change values.
Currently — Shows whether this function is enabled or disabled.
Startup airflow setpoint — This is the value that the outdoor air setpoint sends to the AHU when
the VAS transitions from an unoccupied mode to an occupied mode.
Maximum Outdoor Air AHU can condition — This is the maximum percentage of outdoor air
that the AHU can deliver to the space.
VAV Maximum Percentage of Outdoor Air Request — This is the maximum allowed
percentage of outdoor air that a VAV box can request. The VAS sends this value to the VAV box.
Reset Interval for Recalculation — This is the amount of time before the VAS will recalculate
a new outdoor air flow setpoint.
Status
This area contains status values for this function. Click refresh to update the values.
Important: cancel — Click to return to the previous page. Changes made on this page will not
be saved.
save — Click to save your changes.
Members Page
This page shows current members for the selected VAS. In addition, you can select to add more
members.
Access
Click Members from the VAS Status page, the VAS Configuration page, or the VAS Functions
page.

Content
The following pages for the VAS are available from the Functions page by clicking the appropriate
button at the top of the page.
• status — Click to open the Status page for this VAS
• configure — Click to open the Configure page for this VAS
• functions— Click to open the Functions page for this VAS
Air Handler Section

This section shows air handlers that are members of the this VAS and the current occupancy for
each.
• actions — Click or pause over this button to take action on a selected member
• + Air Handler — Click to open the Add Air Handler Member page (only available is no AHU
members are selected)
VAV Box Section

This section shows VAV boxes that are members of this VAS and the current occupancy and status
for each.
• + add VAV box — Click to open the Add VAV Box Member page
Ventilation Section
This section shows ventilation members for this VAS and the current occupancy for each.
• + Air Handler — Click to open the Add Air Handler Member page
Add the Area to an HVAC Schedule

Once Areas and the VAS are created, you need to create schedules and add the Area to an HVAC
schedule. Tracer SC uses schedules that are BACnet compliant. Because of this, an individual
schedule is required for each data type. Therefore, Tracer SC has four types of schedules:
• HVAC schedules
• Analog output schedules
• Binary output schedules
• Multi-state output schedules
HVAC Schedules
When scheduling Areas, and you want to use Optimal Start and Stop, use an HVAC schedule. HVAC
schedules are actually multi-state schedules with some additional functionality built in for Optimal
Start. You can use HVAC schedules for Trane equipment, but the equipment will not respond to the
Optimal Start/Stop functions of the schedule. It is better to use a multi-state schedule for
equipment.
Do not include equipment in HVAC schedules if you plan to use Optimal Start/Stop, because
Best Optimal Start/Stop are functions of Area and typically only Areas are members of HVAC
Practice schedules.
An advantage to using HVAC schedules for Areas is that HVAC schedules use Trane’s
implementation of occupancy, which is Occupied, Unoccupied, Standby, and Bypass. Whereas,
multi-state schedules use actual values such as “1”, “2”, “3”, ...up to “20” instead of state text to
designate the state of the device (per the BACnet standard).

In this Tracer SC Air Systems Applications Guide, we will only be using HVAC schedules. For more
information on analog output, binary output, and multi-state schedules, refer to the Tracer SC
online help.
Analog Output Schedules
Analog output schedules are comparable to the Set Analog function in Tracer Summit. Keep in
mind that in Tracer Summit you can mix schedule types, where Tracer SC has BACnet compliant
schedules, which must be kept separate by data type. When you want to schedule an analog output
or an analog value to change, you can use an analog output schedule. Examples of when you might
use an analog output schedule:
• In a ventilation optimization scenario, you can schedule the outdoor air requirement airflow for
a space based on the expected occupancy. For instance if you know a classroom will be filled
with 20 people between 1 PM and 3 PM, you can schedule the outdoor air airflow rate to change
from 200 cfm to 400 cfm for that 2 hour duration. At 3 PM, after everyone has left the classroom,
you can schedule the rate to return to 200 cfm.
• It is also useful for scheduling changes to setpoint values. For instance, if you want the chilled
water temperature setpoint for your chiller plant at 40°F at 4 AM, and at 45°F at 10 AM, you could
use an analog output schedule to accomplish to make those changes.
Binary Output Schedules
Binary output schedules allow you to schedule On/Off events for binary outputs and binary values.
An example of when you might use a binary output schedule:
• This is a useful schedule to control lighting. For instance, you can control binary outputs to
parking lot lights with a binary output schedule.
• You can use a binary output schedule to control internal lighting in conjunction with HVAC
control. However, these are two different schedules in Tracer SC.
Multi-state Output Schedules
Multi-state output schedules are very similar to HVAC schedules and allow you to schedule multi-
state outputs and values. However, a multi-state schedule does not have the capability to perform
optimal start and stop functions. Each multi-state schedule contains 20 states. Each state is
identified by number and has no state text associated with it. Use multi-state schedules to control
equipment that does not require the optimal functions.

Create an HVAC Schedule with the Create Schedule Wizard

Once the Area is created, you need to create an HVAC schedule and add the Area to it as a member.
1. Select schedules from the left-hand navigation.
2. The Active Schedules list page appears. Click Create schedule... (Figure 66).
.
Figure 66. Schedule list page
3. The Schedule Information page appears (Figure 67). Type in a name for the schedule.
4. Select the HVAC schedule option and click the Optimal Start/Stop check box.
5. Click next.
Figure 67. Create Schedule - Schedule Information

6. The Schedule Times page appears (Figure 68). The current date displays as the default Start
Date in the Specify Effective Dates group. Choose the Start Date and End Date for your HVAC
schedule.
Figure 68. Create Schedule - Schedule Times
7. Add the effective days and times for the schedule. Click + add event.
8. The Add event -HVAC window appears (Figure 69). Select the check boxes for Start Time, Stop
Time, and the days of the week you want to schedule. Set the Start Time and Stop Time. Click
add.
Figure 69. Create Schedule - Add Events

9. A vertical bar appears on each day you selected with the appropriate start and stop time
(Figure 68, p. 111). Click + add optimal window.
10. The Add Optimal Window appears (Figure 70). Select the check boxes for Start Time, Stop
Time, and the days of the week you want to schedule an optimal window. Set the Start Time
and Stop Time. Click add.
Figure 70. Add Optimal Events
11. A darker vertical bar representing the optimal window appears behind the event bar on each
day with the appropriate start and stop times set (Figure 68, p. 111). Click next.
Important: The optimal window defines a period of time in which Optimal Start and Optimal
Stop can occur if the conditions are right. It does not define exactly when the
optimal events will start and stop. For detailed information on how Optimal Start
and Optimal Stop operate, refer to “Optimal Start (PreCool/Morning Warm-up,”
p. 122 and “Optimal Stop,” p. 127.
12. The Select Members page appears (Figure 71). Click on areas in the selection tree, highlight
the Areas available in the available items column, and click add >.
Important: Areas can be member of more than one HVAC schedule. However, the effective
dates and times of those schedules cannot overlap.
13. The appropriate Area moves to the selected items column. Click next.

Figure 71. Wizard - Select Members
14. The Summary page appears. This page is a summary of all the settings you defined in the
wizard and allows you to verify that they are as you expected them to be (refer to Figure 72,
p. 114).
15. To change any of the parameters, click previous until you come to the page of the wizard that
allows you to change the parameter.
16. To save the settings for the HVAC schedule and close the wizard, click finish.
17. The Confirmation page appears (Figure 73, p. 115). This page shows you the created schedule
and confirms that it has been created successfully.

Figure 72. Wizard - Summary

Figure 73. Confirmation page

VAV Calibration
During a VAV calibration, the controller:
1. Closes the damper.
2. Reads the voltage from the flow sensor at zero airflow.
To prevent duct over-pressurization, the SC divides the VAV boxes into 6 groups and
staggers the command to calibrate between these six groups. A new group of VAV boxes
calibrates every 15 minutes until finished.
3. Closes the water valve and zeros the valve position.
4. When calibration is complete, the VAV box resumes normal operation.
Auto-Calibration
One of the features of the Tracer VV550/551 and UC400 VAV controllers is auto-calibration. Auto-
calibration eliminates the need for scheduled calibration in most applications. A calibration
sequence is initiated after either a power cycle, or when the operating mode of the VAV box
transitions from Occupied to Unoccupied. Actual calibration of the VAV boxes begins after a fixed,
3-minute delay.
Initiating a Scheduled Calibration

As an alternate to auto-calibration, VAV boxes may be recalibrated by scheduling a binary output
(BOP) object referenced to the VAV Calibration field in the VAS editor.
1. Create a binary output object in Tracer SC.
2. Select Schedules... from the main menu.
3. Add the binary output object as a member of a new or existing schedule.
4. Schedule the BOP to ON (1-Recalibrate) for at least one minute.
5. Schedule the BOP to OFF (0-Normal).
6. Select VAV Air Systems > [specific system...] from the main menu.
7. On the Configure page, reference the binary output in the VAV Calibration field.
VAV boxes that are always Occupied (a hospital is a good example) can only be recalibrated by
Best scheduling calibration.
Practice
Manually Initiating an Unscheduled Calibration

Initiate an unscheduled calibration sequence from the VAS Configure page.
Figure 74. Manually Initiating Calibration
1. On the VAS Configure page, select the override icon for the calibration trigger.
2. The Override page appears, in the Override Value frame,
3. Change the Change Value To field to Recalibrate.

4. Select the Allow the change to expire check box.

5. Set the value to expire in 2 minutes.
6. Click Save.
Commissioning and Checkout

For basic information about commissioning the system, refer to the Tracer VV550/551 VAV
Controller Installation and Operation guide (CNT-SVX17A-EN) and the Installation Operation
Manual Tracer UC400 Programmable BACnet Controller (VAV-SVX07A-EN).
Refer to “Commissioning,” p. 140 for additional information on commissioning the system after it
has been set up.
Figure 75. Auto-commissioning Active Frame

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commis
Commissio n Building Operator
Optim
Optimiz
Maintain
Standard Operating Modes

This section explains the following standard operating modes:
• Unoccupied heating/cooling
• Optimal start (PreCool/Morning Warm-up)
• Humidity Pull Down
• Warm-up with normal start (no optimal start)
• Daytime Warm-up
• Optimal stop
• Night purge
• Unoccupied dehumidify
• Unoccupied humidify
• Timed override
• General Settings - Best Practices
Important: Most of the actions (i.e., scheduling, optimal start, unoccupied heat/cool, etc.) are
initiated by the Area(s) containing the VAV boxes. The VAS monitors the VAV boxes
and controls the air handler accordingly.
Important: For detailed information on how Area controls its members based on operating
mode, refer to Table 19, p. 242
For the standard operating modes to work properly, the system must be set up in a specific way.
For a summary of these settings and practices, refer to “General Settings,” p. 136. For detailed setup
instructions refer to “Tracer SC Application Setup for Variable Air Systems,” p. 72”.
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
The easiest way to reduce heating and cooling energy consumption and cost during unoccupied
periods is to expand the space temperature setpoints (sometimes referred to as night setback).
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling allows the temperature in a conditioned space to fall/rise to the
unoccupied setpoints before enabling the HVAC equipment.

Implementing Unoccupied Heating/Cooling requires both the Scheduling and Area functions in
Tracer SC.
1. On the Area page, set the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints to temperature limits that
will protect the building.
Area unoccupied cooling setpoint = 85°F (29.4°C)(default)

Best Area unoccupied heating setpoint:
Practice
• Unoccupied heating with central fan = 60°F (15.6°C)(default)
• Unoccupied heating without central fan = 40°F (4.4°C)(refer to Table 11, p. 120)
2. Create a schedule for each area (refer to “Add the Area to an HVAC Schedule,” p. 108).
3. Assign the areas as members of the appropriate HVAC schedule.
4. Unoccupy the areas by creating an HVAC schedule with an unoccupied event.
When Unoccupied Heating/Cooling begins, the area occupancy is controlled to Unoccupied by the
HVAC schedule. In turn area controls the operating mode of the area members to unoccupied and,
consequently, the VAS controls the operating mode of the air handler and common space VAV
boxes to unoccupied.
While Unoccupied, the Area monitors the space temperature continuously. If the space
temperature reaches the unoccupied heating setpoint (Unoccupied Heat) or the unoccupied
cooling setpoint (Unoccupied Cool), the Area controls the operating mode of the VAV members to
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. The VAS then controls the operating mode of the air handler and
common space VAV boxes to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling.
The operating mode of the VAV boxes remain in Unoccupied until the Area space temperature:
• Rises above the Unoccupied Heating setpoint plus the Unoccupied differential, or
• Falls below the Unoccupied Cooling setpoint minus the Unoccupied differential
Note: The Area occupancy remains Unoccupied until Scheduling controls it to Optimal Start or
Occupied.
Unoccupied Heating
When an Area space temperature sensor value falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint (refer
to Figure 76 note), the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. The Area
application controls the operating mode of each Heating Only, and Heating/Cooling VAV member
to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. VAS detects this transition, which causes the VAS operating mode
transition to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, which enables the VAV air handler. Ventilation members
and Cooling Only members remain Unoccupied or Off.
Unoccupied heating stops when the Area's inside space temperature rises above the unoccupied
heating setpoint plus the unoccupied differential (Area > Configuration page).
Use the default value for the unoccupied differential, which is 4.0°F (2.2°C).
Best
Practice

Figure 76. Unoccupied heat
Unoccupied Heat
Space Ends
Temperature
64° F
Unoccupied Differential
is locked out
60° F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heat Heating
Starts setpoint
Note: Area occupancy remains Unoccupied until an HVAC Schedule controls it to Optimal Start or
Occupied.
Important: To disable the reheat in the VAV boxes when their operating mode is Unoccupied,
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, Night Purge, or Optimal Start, uncheck the Allow VAV
Aux Heat at Night check box in the VAS editor (Setup tab) as shown in Table 11.
Table 11. Unoccupied heating scenarios and setup
Scenario Editor Settings Example
Heating with central heat only VAS editor (Setup tab) Gas heat in the air handler
Applies when it is most cost effective Disable local heat. and electric heat in the VAV
to heat the spaces using only the boxes
heat source in the air handler during The air handler is enabled
unoccupied periods. and uses its heat to
maintain the discharge air
heating setpoint.
Local heat at the VAV boxes
is disabled.

Table 11. Unoccupied heating scenarios and setup
Heating with local heat and a Area editor There is no heat in the AHU
central fan The unoccupied heating setpoint of the Area and shutoff VAV boxes with
Applies when the air handler has no is 60.0°F (15.6°C) reheat. The central fan
heat or insufficient heat, or the VAV must run for heat.
The unoccupied differential of the Area is
boxes are equipped with reheat but 4.0°F (2.2°C).
have no fan.
VAV editor
The central fan is used to:
The VAV box unoccupied heating setpoint
• provide air flow allowing VAV should be less than the Area unoccupied
boxes to use their local heat. heating setpoint (VAV editor, Configuration
• circulate air between interior and tab). This prevents the VAV box from using
exterior zones to facilitate the its local heat when its operating mode is
warm-up process. unoccupied.
The VAV box controls local heat to
its occupied setpoints when its VAS editor (Setup tab)
mode is warm-up. Enable local heat.
Heating with local heat only Area editor Parallel fan-powered VAV
(central fan not used during The Area unoccupied heating setpoint boxes with reheat located
unoccupied heating) (Setup tab) should be set to a very low value around the perimeter of
Applies when the air handler is not (e.g., 40°F (4.4°C)). the building.
equipped with heat and the central Note: Do this so the Area never controls
fan will not be used during unoccu- the VAV boxes during unoccupied heating.
pied heating.
The VAV box manages all the heat- VAV editor
ing during unoccupied periods by The unoccupied heating setpoint of the VAV
using its local heat and/or enabling box is 60.0°F (15.6°C).
its remote (perimeter) heat. The The unoccupied differential of the VAV box is
VAV boxes will remain in the unoc- +/- 1.5°F (0.9°C).
cupied mode and use their unoccu-
• Local heat is enabled at 58.5°F (14.7°C)
pied heating setpoints.
• Local heat is disabled at 61.5°F (16.4°C)
Note: A series or parallel fan is
required if the heat is in the VAV
box. VAS editor (Setup tab)
Enable local heat.

Unoccupied Cooling
When an Area space temperature sensor value rises above the unoccupied cooling setpoint (refer
to Figure 77 note), the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. The Area
application controls the operating mode of each Cooling Only, and Heating/Cooling VAV member
to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. VAS detects this transition, which causes the VAS operating mode
to transition to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, which enables the VAV air handler. Ventilation
members and Heating Only members remain Unoccupied or Off.
Unoccupied Cooling stops when the Area's inside space temperature falls below the unoccupied
cooling setpoint minus the unoccupied differential (System > Area > Configuration page).
Use the default value for the unoccupied differential, which is 4.0°F (2.2°C).
Best
Practice
Figure 77. Unoccupied Cooling
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling Cooling
Starts setpoint
85° F
Unoccupied Differential
is locked out
81° F
Space Unoccupied Cooling

Temperature Ends
Note: The Area occupancy remains Unoccupied until Scheduling controls it to Optimal Start or
Occupied.
Optimal Start (PreCool/Morning Warm-up

Optimal start is the process of the HVAC Schedule and Area functions working together to PreCool
or warm-up a building prior to occupancy so the temperature is at or close to its occupied setpoints
when the building becomes occupied.
Note: The air handler may keep the outdoor air damper closed during Optimal Start because it
occurs during Unoccupied periods. The Area occupancy remains Unoccupied as dictated
by the HVAC Schedule.
Cooling (Area is in the Cooling Mode)

1. Area determines the actual time to control the operating mode of VAV boxes to Optimal Start
based on the Area inside space temperature, the occupied cooling setpoint, and the associated
cooling optimal start rate.
2. When the calculated start time falls within the optimal window defined in the HVAC Schedule:
• The Area operating mode transitions to Optimal Start.
• The Area operating mode for cooling only and heating/cooling members transitions to
Optimal Start.
Example:
Initial space temperature = 79°F (26.1°C)
Cooling Optimal Start rate = 8 min/°F (14.54min/°C)(learned by Area)
Occupied start time = 8:00 AM
Optimal Start window = 6:00 to 8:00 AM
Occupied cooling setpoint = 75°F (23.9°C)
Area calculates the optimal start time as follows:
(79°F - 75°F) x 8 min/°F = 32 minutes
or
(26.1°C - 23.9°C) x 14.54 min/°C = 32 minutes
Figure 78. Optimal start cooling (shown in °F)
Calculated Optimal Start Time Initial

Space
Temperature
79° F
Cooling
Begins Space
Temperature Occupied
Cooling
is locked out
setpoint
75° F
Unoccupied Optimal Start Occupied

Ends
7:28 AM 8:00 AM
Heating (Area is in the Heating Mode)

1. Area determines the actual time to control the operating mode of VAV boxes to Optimal Start
based on the inside space temperature, the occupied heating setpoint, and the associated
heating optimal start rate.
• The Area operating mode transitions to Optimal Start
• The operating mode of the Area heating only and heating/cooling members transitions to
Optimal Start
Example:
Initial space temperature = 65°F (18.3°C)
Heating Optimal Start rate = 10 min/°F (17.85 min/°C)(learned by Area)
Optimal Start window = 6:00 to 8:00 AM
Occupied heating setpoint = 70°F (21.1°C)


(70°F - 65°F) x 10 min/°F = 50 minutes
or
(21.1°C - 18.3°C) x 17.85 min/°C = 50 minutes
Figure 79. Optimal start heating (shown in °F)
Optimal Start
Calculated Optimal Start Time Ends
70° F
Occupied
Heating
setpoint
Space
is locked out
Heating Temperature Initial

Begins Space
Temperature
65° F
Unoccupied Occupied
7:10 AM 8:00 AM
Setup
Create an HVAC Schedule with an optimal window defined and an Area added as a member.
Table 12. Optimal Start heating scenarios
Heating with central heat only Scheduling editor Gas heat in the air handler
Applies when it is most cost effec- Create an HVAC Schedule with an optimal and electric heat in the
tive to heat the spaces using only window defined with an 8:00 AM start. Add VAV boxes
the heat source in the air handler. the Area as a member of this schedule. Area initiates Optimal
VAS editor (Setup tab) Start at 7:10 AM
Disable the local heat. The air handler is enabled
and uses its heat to main-
tain the discharge air heat-
ing setpoint.
Local heat at the VAV
boxes is disabled.

Table 12. Optimal Start heating scenarios (continued)
Heating with local heat and a Schedule editor The Area's space tempera-
central fan Create an HVAC Schedule with an optimal ture is 65°F (18.3°C) and
Applies when the air handler has window defined with an 8:00 AM start. Add you want to warm it up so
no heat or if its heat is disabled the Area as a member of this schedule. that it gets to 70°F (21.1°C)
during unoccupied periods, and VAS editor (Setup tab) just as the building is
the VAV boxes are equipped with occupied at 8:00 AM. So
Enable the local heat.
reheat but have no fan. warm-up begins at 7:10
AM. The air handler has
The central fan is used to:
no heat and the VAV boxes
• Provide air flow allowing VAV are configured with hot
boxes to use their local heat water reheat.
• Circulate air between interior and
exterior zones to facilitate the
warm-up process
The VAV box controls local heat to
its occupied setpoints when its
mode is Warm-up.
Humidity Pull Down

Humidity Pull Down is the process of the HVAC Schedule and Area functions working together to
reduce the humidity in a building prior to occupancy so the humidity is at or close to its occupied
humidity setpoint when the building becomes occupied.
Note: The air handler may keep the outdoor air damper closed during Humidity Pull Down
because it occurs during Unoccupied periods. The Area occupancy request remains
Unoccupied by the HVAC Schedule; Area occupancy status transitions to Occupied.
To Set Up Humidity Pull Down:

Follow these steps to set up humidity pull down:
1. When configuring an Area, reference the space humidity sensor.
2. Enable Humidity Pull Down (Figure 80).
3. Enter an Occupied Humidity Setpoint (default is 50%).
4. Add Members to the Area with the dehumidification check box selected.
5. Create an HVAC Schedule with an optimal window and add the Area to the schedule as a
member.
Figure 80. Humidity Pull Down Settings

Sequence
Area implements Humidity Pulldown as follows:
1. Area determines the actual time to control the operating mode of VAV boxes to Humidity Pull
Down based on the Area inside humidity sensor, the occupied humidity setpoint, and the
associated humidity pull down start rate.
• The Area operating mode transitions to Humidity Pull Down.
• The operating mode of the Area cooling only and heating/cooling members transitions to
Humidity Pull Down.
Example:
Initial space humidity = 55%
Humidity pull down rate = 8 min/% RH (learned by Area)
Optimal window = 6:00 to 8:00 AM
Occupied humidity setpoint = 50%
Area calculates the humidity pull down time as follows:
(55% - 50%) x 8 min/% RH = 40 minutes
Figure 81. Humidity Pull Down
Calculated Humidity Pull Down Time Initial

Space
Humidity
55%
Humidity Pull Down

Begins Space
Humidity Occupied
Humidity
is locked out
setpoint
50%
Unoccupied Humidity Pull Down Occupied

Ends
7:20 AM 8:00 AM
Warm-up with Normal Start (No Optimal Start)

Warm-up with a normal start occurs when there is no optimal window defined in the HVAC
schedule, and the schedule controls the Area occupancy from Unoccupied to Occupied. The air
handler compares the active space temperature it is receiving from VAS against its occupied
heating setpoints to determine whether to produce hot air or cold air.

Daytime Warm-up
Important: Daytime Warm-up is a function of the AHU controller. Specific setpoints and
deadbands may vary between AHU controllers.
Daytime Warm-up occurs during occupied periods. When the air handler’s space temperature is
colder than its “Daytime Warm-up Setpoint”, the air handler supplies hot air to the system. When
the space becomes too cold again, Daytime Warm-up runs again.
Figure 82. TGP2 space temperature control program
Follow the best practices defined in “Controller Setup,” p. 33 and sending the VAS Average Space
Temperature calculated in the VAS to the VAV air handler space temperature point (Figure 82). Use
Tracer TU to create this TGP2 program and download it to the Tracer SC controlling the VAV air
handler.
Optimal Stop
Optimal stop is an energy saving feature managed by the HVAC Schedule and Area applications.
During optimal stop the zone temperature is allowed to rise above the Occupied cooling setpoint
or fall below the Occupied heating setpoint. The VAV boxes control to their Occupied Standby
setpoints. The air handler behaves as it does when it’s in the Occupied mode.
Cooling (Area is in the Cooling Mode)

1. Area determines the actual time to control the operating mode of VAV boxes to Optimal Stop
based on the space temperature sensor, the occupied cooling setpoint plus 2°F (1.1°C)(not
editable), and the associated cooling optimal stop rate.
2. When the stop time falls within the window of opportunity provided by the Schedule, the
operating mode of the Area and its VAV members transition to Optimal Stop.
Example:
Initial space temperature = 73.5°F (23°C)
Cooling Optimal Stop rate = 14 min/°F (25.2 min/°C)(learned by Area)
Unoccupied start time = 5:00 PM
Optimal Stop window = 3:30 to 5:00 PM
Occupied cooling setpoint = 74°F (23.3°C)
((74°F + 2°F) - 73.5°F) x 14 min/°F = 35 minutes
or
((23.3°C + 1.1°C) - 23°C) x 25.2 min/°C = 35 minutes

Figure 83. Optimal stop cooling (shown in °F)
Calculated Optimal Stop Time Optimal Stop

Ends
76° F
Occupied
Cooling
Space setpoint
is locked out
Temperature
74° F
Unoccupied
73.5° F
Initial
Space
Temperature
4:25 PM 5:00 PM
Heating (Area is in the Heating Mode)

Heating is similar to cooling during optimal stop with the exception that Area determines the actual
time to control the operating mode of VAV boxes to Optimal Stop based on the space temperature
sensor, the occupied heating setpoint minus 2°F (1.1°C), and the associated heating optimal stop
rate.
Example:
Initial space temperature = 70.6°F (21.4°C)
Cooling Optimal Stop rate = 15 min/°F (27 min/°C)(learned by Area)
Unoccupied start time = 5:00 PM
Optimal Stop window = 3:30 to 5:00 PM
Occupied heating setpoint = 71°F (21.6°C)
(70.6°F – (71°F – 2°F)) x 15 min/°F = 24 minutes
or
(21.4°C – (21.6°C – 1.1°C)) x 27 min/°C = 24 minutes

Figure 84. Optimal stop heating (shown in °F)
Occupied
Calculated Optimal Stop Time
Heating
setpoint
71° F
Initial
Space Space Temperature
Temperature
70.6° F
is locked out
Optimal Stop
Ends
69° F
Unoccupied
4:36 PM 5:00 PM
Setup
Create an HVAC Schedule with an optimal window defined and an Area added as a member. The
stop event must occur within the defined optimal window.
Night Purge (Night Economizing)

Night purge, which is also known as night economizing, is an efficient way to pre-cool a building
in the late-night/early-morning hours without using chilled water or direct expansion (DX) cooling.
Its function is to cool the space by exchanging warm inside air with cool, dry outdoor air.
Note: Dry climates are more likely to provide suitable outdoor air conditions for Night Purge than
humid climates.
The intent of Night Purge is to minimize or possibly eliminate the need for mechanical cooling when
the space initially becomes Occupied. An additional benefit is the potential to improve indoor air
quality.
Night purge only occurs if all of the following are true:
• the Area must be unoccupied.
• night purge must be enabled within the Area application.
• night purge must be scheduled within the Area application.
• the current time is within the scheduled time to night purge.
• Area's space temperature sensor must be warmer than its occupied cooling setpoint by 1°F
(0.56°C).
• Area is in cooling mode.
• Night Purge's Economizing decision must be Enabled (refer to “Setup,” p. 130 for more
information).
• Area's outdoor air temperature must be colder than its space temperature sensor by the
amount specified in the Outdoor/Space Temperature Differential field (refer to “Setup,” p. 130
for more information).

For normal AHU systems, outside dampers are open and return air dampers are closed. All exhaust
fans operate at full speed.
All night purge VAV members of the Area control to their occupied cooling setpoint.
Night purge ends when any of the following is true:
• The current time is outside the scheduled time to night purge.
• The night purge input is disabled.
• The outdoor temperature is above the space temperature.
• The Area transitions to a heating mode.
• The space temperature falls below its occupied cooling setpoint minus the binary control
differential (1°F (.56°C)).
The Night Purge window (on the Area Function page) should be scheduled to occur during the
Best coolest time of the early morning, typically just before sunrise. For example, if sunrise is at 6
Practice AM or later, schedule Night Purge from 4 to 6 AM.
Setup
Setup for Night Purge occurs in the Area function page for the selected Area.
1. Enable Night Purge.
2. Click the referencer icon for Economizing decision.
3. The Referencer page appears, select the pre-defined referencer for the Area Economizing
decision.
Note: If desired, a binary point may be referenced to the Economizing decision input. This
input allows additional criteria, such as unit economizing decisions to be used.
The Area Economizing decision should be enabled. The referencer for the Night Purge
Best Economizing decision should be set to look at the Area Economizing decision.
Practice
4. Set the inside/outside temperature differential to 15°F (8.3°C)(default).

Note: The outdoor air temperature must be below the space temperature, minus the value in
the Outdoor/Space Temperature Differential field, before Night Purge occurs.
5. Schedule the Night Purge windows (seven possible—one for each day).
6. Select the Area VAV box members that will respond to Night Purge events (Figure 85, p. 131).

Figure 85. Area member function page
Example: A building has been unoccupied over the weekend and the internal temperature has
been maintained at 82°F (27.8°C) by the Area Unoccupied Heating/Cooling function. A Night
Purge event will occur at 4 AM Monday morning under the following conditions.
• Night Purge is enabled.
• The Night Purge Economizing decision is enabled.
• The outdoor/space temperature differential is set to 15° (8.3°C)
• A Night Purge window is configured to occur between 4 AM and 6 AM.
• The Area occupied cooling setpoint is 75°F (23.9°C).
Night Purge will exchange the 82°F (27.8°C) air from inside the building with the cooler outdoor
air.
Figure 86. Night Purge example (shown in °F)
Night Initial
Purge Space
Begins Temperature
82° F
Space
Temperature Occupied
Cooling
is locked out
Night setpoint
Purge
Ends
75° F
74° F
4:00 AM 6:00 AM

Unoccupied Humidification
Unoccupied Humidification is the process of the HVAC Schedule and Area functions working
together to increase the humidity in a building during unoccupied times to maintain a minimum
humidity level within the space.
Note: The air handler may keep the outdoor air damper closed during Unoccupied Humidification
because it occurs during Unoccupied periods. The Area occupancy request remains
Unoccupied by the HVAC Schedule; the Area occupancy status transitions to Occupied.
To Set Up Unoccupied Humidification:

Follow these steps to set up Unoccupied Humidification:
2. Enable Unoccupied Humidify (Figure 87).
3. Enter an Enable Humidification Setpoint (default is 20%).
4. Enter an Disable Humidification Setpoint (default is 25%).
5. Add Members to the Area with the humidification check box selected.
6. Create an HVAC Schedule and add the Area to the schedule as a member.
Figure 87. Unoccupied Humidify Settings
Important: Humidification members are air handlers with humidifiers, or binary outputs
controlling humidifiers that are also a member of the Area. Insure that these
members are configured as humidification members when adding them to the Area.
Sequence
Area implements Unoccupied Humidification as follows:
1. When the Area is Unoccupied and Unoccupied Humidification is Enabled, Area compares the
space humidity with the Enable Humidification Setpoint. When the space humidity falls below
the Enable Humidification Setpoint, the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied
Humidification. When this transition occurs:
• All humidification members of the Area transition to Unoccupied Humidify.
• All members of the Area not designated as humidification members remain Unoccupied or
Off.
2. When the space humidity rises above the Disable Humidification Setpoint, the Area operating
mode transitions to Unoccupied. When this transition occurs:
• All humidification members of the Area transition to Unoccupied or Off.
• All members of the Area not designated as humidification members remain Unoccupied or
Off.

Example:
Enable Humidification Setpoint = 20%
Disable Humidification Setpoint = 25%
Figure 88. Unoccupied humidification
Humidification
Space Ends
Humidification
25%
is locked out
20%
Humidification Enable
Starts Humidification
setpoint
Note: Area occupancy request, remains Unoccupied until an HVAC Schedule controls it to
Occupied; the occupancy status will transition to Occupied during this mode.
Unoccupied Dehumidification
Unoccupied Dehumidification is the process of the HVAC Schedule and Area functions working
together to decrease the humidity in a building during unoccupied times to maintain a maximum
humidity level within the space.
Note: The air handler may keep the outdoor air damper closed during Unoccupied
Dehumidification because it occurs during Unoccupied periods. The Area occupancy
request remains Unoccupied by the HVAC Schedule; the Area occupancy status transitions
to Occupied.
To Set Up Unoccupied Dehumidification:

Follow these steps to set up Unoccupied Dehumidification:
2. Enable Unoccupied Dehumidify (Figure 89).
3. Enter an Enable Dehumidification Setpoint (default is 60%).
4. Enter an Disable Dehumidification Setpoint (default is 55%).
5. Add Members to the Area with the dehumidification check box selected.
6. Create an HVAC Schedule and add the Area to the schedule as a member.

Figure 89. Unoccupied Dehumidify Settings
Sequence
Area implements Unoccupied Dehumidification as follows:
1. When the Area is Unoccupied and Unoccupied Dehumidification is Enabled, Area compares the
space humidity with the Enable Dehumidification Setpoint. When the space humidity rises
above the Enable Humidification Setpoint, the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied
Dehumidification. When this transition occurs:
• All dehumidification members of the Area transition to Unoccupied Dehumidify.
• All members of the Area not designated as dehumidification members remain Unoccupied
or Off.
2. When the space humidity falls below the Disable Dehumidification Setpoint, the Area operating
mode transitions to Unoccupied. When this transition occurs:
• All dehumidification members of the Area transition to Unoccupied or Off.
• All members of the Area not designated as dehumidification members remain Unoccupied
or Off.
Example:
Enable Dehumidification Setpoint = 60%
Disable Dehumidification Setpoint = 55%
Figure 90. Unoccupied Dehumidification
Enable
Dehumidification Dehumidification
Starts setpoint
60%
is locked out
55%
Space Dehumidification
Humidity Ends
Note: Area occupancy request remains Unoccupied until an HVAC Schedule controls it to
Occupied; the occupancy status will transition to Occupied during this mode.

Timed Override
During unoccupied periods, a Timed Override request (typically initiated by pressing the On button
at a zone sensor attached to a VAV box) controls the Area occupancy request to Standby at a higher
priority than the Schedule for a specified duration.
Timed override ends when the time defined in the Duration field expires for the temporary override,
or the Cancel button on a zone sensor in the Area is pressed. When Timed Override ends, the
schedule regains control of the Area occupancy request.
Setup
Figure 91 details specific settings used to make Timed Override work properly.
Figure 91. Timed override setup. Area configuration page, operations frame
Timed override must be enabled.
Set the duration for a Timed Override

(the default is 120 minutes)
Optional input is a multi-state point

with the following enumerations:
1 = Normal
2 = Initiate Timed override
3 = Cancel
Figure 92. Timed override setup. Area Member configuration page
The zone sensors used to initiate the timed override must be

connected to Area members enabled for Override (check box
selected).

General Settings
These settings are considered best practices for each of these Standard Operating modes.
VAV Configuration
• Configure the VAV boxes prior to installing into Tracer SC.
• The Heat/Cool Request field is set to Auto.
VAV Box (Done in Rover for LonTalk Devices)

• Configured for space temperature control.
• Auto calibrate is enabled.
• Star and double star (*/**) is not enabled (check box is not selected in the Rover editor).
• Auto changeover setpoint = 80°F (26.7°C) (Rover setting, Configuration > Unit tab).
• Occupied bypass time = 0 min.
Variable Volume Air Handler

• The air handler is a variable air volume unit.
• Configure the air handlers prior to installing into Tracer SC.
• Heat/Cool Request: = Auto
• Space Temperature Sensor BAS = VAS Average Space Temperature (done using TGP2, refer to
Figure 82, p. 127).
• The air handler has no local space/morning warm-up temperature sensor.
Area Configuration
Configure page - Setup
• Area Heat/Cool Request: = Auto (Configuration page)
• Reference the Space Temperature Sensor (Configuration page, Setup) to the pre-defined
referencer for the Area Average Space Temperature.
• Reference the Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (Configuration page, Setup) to the pre-defined
referencer for the Facility Outdoor Air Temperature.
• If Economizing with Enthalpy or Dew Point, reference the Space Humidity sensor and the
Outdoor Air Humidity sensor (not shown as referenced in Figure 93).

Figure 93. Area Configure page, Setup section
Set these references.
Verify that the Heat Cool Request is set to

Auto
Configure page - Operations

• Select Enabled for Unoccupied Heating/Cooling in the Area Configuration Operations section.
• Outdoor Air Temperature Compensation is Enabled (refer to Figure 94).
Figure 94. Area Configuration, Operations section
These must be enabled.
Members configuration
• Each VAV box is a Heat/Cool member of the Area. (select Add or Edit Members on the Members
page).

Figure 95. Setting the Heat/Cool Request
• The Calculations, Override, and Night Purge check boxes are selected for each VAV member
(Members Configuration page). If performing humidification or dehumidification, those check
boxes must also be selected.
Figure 96. Area Member Types (with no humidity control)
VAS Configuration
• All of the VAV boxes, which are part of the VAV system, should be defined as members of the
VAS.
• Select the Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night check box.
• Select the Send source temperature to VAV boxes check box.
• Select the Send drive max to VAV boxes check box.
• Air Handler Startup Delay = 2 min.
• VAV Box Shutdown Delay = 5 min.
• The VAV AHU Startup Setpoint is set to 72.0°F (22.2°C).
• Calibration Trigger is set to Normal.

Figure 97. VAS Configuration page
• Select the appropriate optimization strategies for the installation.

• If using an MP580/581, it MUST be configured with a DAC profile in order to be an AHU member
of the VAS.
Scheduling Configuration
• Each Area must be a member of either an HVAC Schedule or a Multi-State Schedule
Note: Optimal functions are only available when the Area is a member of an HVAC Schedule.

Design
BAS Tec
ch
hni
n ci
cian
an(s
an (s))
(s
Install
BAS Technician(s)

Operate
O perate BAS Technician
B
Maintain
Commissioning
This section discusses the commissioning process of a variable air system. The intended audience
is the field startup technician with the last section devoted to air balancing. It is important to note
that the LonTalk VAV system commissioning process differs dramatically from previous air
systems due to the unique ability of the VV550/551 controllers to perform auto-commissioning.
Consequently, new best practices are now being recommended.
Best Practice for Commissioning:

• Commission the Air handler. Basic AHU checkout procedures for a VAV AHU including the
duct static pressure sensor, water valves, external heat, zone sensor and Traq dampers
• Check out the communications link. Basic procedures in checking out communication links
as well as a short guide in troubleshooting common problems.
• Configure the VAV controllers. (Refer to “VAV Box Configuration,” p. 40)
• Install VAV boxes on the SC and program Area and VAS in Tracer SC. (Refer to “Tracer
SC Application Setup for Variable Air Systems,” p. 72).
• Auto-commission Trane VAV controllers. A “how to” on checking out VAV control
dampers, water valves, and sensors.
• Perform air and water balance. Provides a overview of the Rover Air and Water Balance tool
which is required for balancing the VAV boxes.
Air Handler Commissioning

To commission the air handler for the purposes of setting up the Tracer SC VAS, consider duct static
pressure control (refer to “Static Pressure Sensor Control,” p. 34) and discharge air temperature
control. These are the only items needed for the Tracer SC VAS and the Rover service tool to auto-
commission the VAV box controllers.
Conduct a more comprehensive startup and checkout of the AHU. This includes verifying proper
operation of all temperature and humidity sensors as well as all damper and any airflow monitors.
This work is beyond the scope of this document and is not covered here.

Commissioning
Commissioning the Communications Link

Next to equipment checkout, troubleshooting a communication link can be the most time
consuming task on a job. This section discusses the procedures to use to effectively checkout a
communications link. Refer to Unit Controller Wiring for Tracer SC, BAS-SVN03A-EN for more
information.
Preliminary Checkout for LonTalk Links

Determine the resistance of the link. This test provides an overall idea of the integrity of the link.
Under typical conditions, a communications link wired with level 4 wire and terminated with 105
Ω termination resistors should read approximately 52 Ω plus approximately 8 Ω per 1,000 feet of
wire. Figure 98 shows what the expected resistance should be for a given length of wire.
Figure 98. Wire resistance graph
90
High
85
Measured Resistance (Ohms)
80
75
Low
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
Wire Length (ft)
If the measured resistance does not fall within the expected values, most of the time it is possible
to determine the nature of the problem from the resistance readings. Table 13 shows some typical
resistance readings for communications links when various problems occur along with the effects
and what to look for when these problems exist. The most common communication link issues are
shorts, open links, or the wrong number of resistors installed on the link. Most of these problems
can be found quickly using a multi-meter to check for link resistance. This can be done with or
without the devices powered up.

Commissioning
Table 13. Troubleshooting at specific resistance readings

Measured Range Effects Look For:
• Circuit is completely open. 1.Check ohmmeter leads.
• Communication failures are seen in the event 2.Check termination resistors.
OL (overload), Infinite, ∞
log 3.Check for open wire connections.
• LonTalk units not found during discovery.
• One of the termination resistors is not 1.Missing or damaged termination resistor at one end
connected. of the link.
• Communication failures may or may not be 2.An improperly connected termination resistor.
seen in the event log.
95-Ω to 130-Ω • LonTalk units may be dropping out
intermittently.
• LonTalk units may or may not be found during
discovery.
• LonTalk repeater will not work correctly.
• Correct resistance measurement. The termination wiring is done correctly. Use other
50Ω to 90Ω (Normal)
• Normal operation troubleshooting techniques if there is still a problem.
• Too many termination resistors. The site may 1.Verify that the site topology is daisy chain.
have been reconfigured. This typically shows no 2.Check for extra termination resistors.
21Ω to 40Ω
symptoms at the BAS level.
• LonTalk repeater may not work correctly.
• There is a short between the two conductors.
• Communication failures are seen in the event
0Ω to 10Ω Check for short between conductors.
log
• LonTalk units not found during discovery.
Finding a Short
Shorts are the most common issue related to communication links. If a short occurs anywhere in
the communications link, a resistance reading between 0 Ω and 10 Ω is typically seen. The easiest
way to determine where the short occurs is to use the divide and conquer technique. This technique
is the fastest way to locate most communications issues and does not require a computer or a
service tool. On a link of 60 devices the problem can typically be found in no more than six steps.
The first step after a problem is detected is to select a device that is approximately in the middle
of the link. At the middle device remove one side of the communication link, which effectively splits
the link into two separate links (refer to Figure 99). The resistance is then read on each of the two
links from the split back to the termination resistors located at each end of the link. One of the two
links will read a short and is the link that contains the problem. The other link reading should be
reading the termination resistor plus the resistance of the wire. Reconnect the communication link
and select a device that represents half the length from the previously tested device and the end
of the link which showed the short. Using the same procedure, measure the resistance of each link.
This procedure is repeated until the wiring problem is located.

Commissioning
Finding an Open Circuit

The same procedure for finding a short in the link can be used to locate an open circuit
(communication link is not terminated or has an open termination).
Figure 99. Broken link
Ω
VAV 03-03
VAV 03-02
VAV 03-05
Ω
VAV 03-01 Open circuit

VAV 03-04
Break the link here and test the

resistance on each end to find the open circuit
Reading too high a resistance on the link indicates that one of the termination resistors is missing
or the link has a break somewhere between the two termination resistors. Verify that both resistors
are installed and read the resistance of the link at each device where the resistor is installed. If the
resistance at both ends of the link are approximately equal to the resistor plus some resistance of
the communication wire then it is safe to assume that the communication link has a break
somewhere between the two end devices.
Rover is helpful in determining where the break is located. The installation contractor should
provide as-built documents that show how the communication link was actually installed. Use
Rover to discover the devices on the link and the as-built documents to determine how many
devices should be on the link. It should be possible to find the approximate location of the break
in the link.
Using Figure 99 as an example, Rover should find three devices when connected to one end of the
communication link or two devices when connected to the other end of the communication link.
The as-built document should indicate that there are five devices on the link.

Commissioning
Preliminary Checkout for BACnet Communication Links

Before you install a BACnet link, devise an address scheme for all the devices on the BACnet link
and then adhere to that scheme. BACnet links operate on MS/TP protocol which dictates that every
device on the link has a unique address. If duplicate addresses occur on the same link, the token
being passed is dropped and communication on the link stops. Once this occurs, it is very difficult
to determine where the problem is on the link (refer to “Troubleshooting Scenario,” p. 145)
Devise an address scheme for all the devices on the BACnet link and then make sure both the
Best installer and BAS technician adhere to that scheme.
Practice
Other things to consider during installation of the devices that will make commissioning and
troubleshooting the link much easier:
• Make sure the devices are wired properly (proper terminations and polarity).
• Label the communication wiring “IN” from the Tracer SC and “OUT” to the next device at each
device. This makes troubleshooting the link much easier. It helps you to know you have
included or excluded the device when splitting the link without trial and error.
The most useful tool for troubleshooting the BACnet link is the Tracer SC itself. All of the issues
below can be discovered by using divide-and-conquer methods. If any BACnet device on the link
is powered up, a digital volt meter will not provide useful information when troubleshooting a
BACnet communication link. The most frequently encountered problems on an MS/TP BACnet link
are:
• An open circuit
• A short circuit
• A duplicate MAC address (duplicate rotary address on the UC)
• UCs that are not addressed (0,0,0 on the UC’s rotary switches)
Before troubleshooting the link, you should have a valid set of prints for the project that show you
how the devices are wired on the link along with their addresses.
The following steps define the general troubleshooting tasks for BACnet links.
1. From the Tracer SC, verify the following:
a. Verify the rotary address setting on the SC (make sure it’s rotary switches match the
submittal documents). If you change the rotary switches, verify the Tracer SC BACnet
configuration using the Tracer SC (Installation > Identification and Communication >
BACnet Configuration)
b. Verify the shield wires are properly terminated per the wiring diagrams.
c. Verify the communication wiring terminal is fully seated on the controller.
d. Verify the polarity of the comm link.
e. Verify that both the in and out are properly terminated on the terminal by performing a tug
test on each wire.
2. Verify that a Tracer BACnet Terminator is properly installed on each end of the comm link.
3. Go to the middle of the link and check the following items. If you find any of these items to be
improperly installed, correct the problem and rediscover using the Tracer SC (Step 4):
a. Verify the rotary address setting on the UC (make sure it’s rotary switches match the
submittal documents). If you find switches set incorrectly, you must change the rotary
address and then cycle power on the UC.

Commissioning
b. Verify the shield wires are properly terminated per the wiring diagrams (and per wiring
guidelines).
c. Verify the communication wiring terminal is fully seated on the controller.
d. Verify the polarity of the comm link.
e. Verify that both the in and out wires are properly terminated on the terminal by performing
a tug test on each wire.
4. Using Tracer SC, discover the link.
5. If all devices are discovered, the problem exists on the outward side (away from the Tracer SC)
of the broken link.
a. Reconnect the link and move half-way farther out on the link and break the link there.
b. Discover the link with Tracer SC.
c. Repeat step 3 until the trouble is isolated.
6. If not all the devices are discovered, the issue with the BACnet link is on the inward side of the
broken link.
a. Reconnect the link and move half-way back toward the Tracer SC and break the link there.
b. Discover the link with Tracer SC.
c. Repeat step 3 until the trouble is isolated.
Troubleshooting Scenario
The following example shows a typical troubleshooting scenario. The example uses a limited
number of UC devices to help illustrate the procedure. Most installations have many more UCs
installed. A link of 30 devices should take no more than five steps to isolate a problem using the
divide-and-conquer method.
Important: To communicate properly, the baud rate for all devices must be the same when they
reside on the MS/TP link. The factory default setting for the baud rate on the UC400
is 76,800. The factory default setting for the baud rate on the Tracer SC is Disabled.
Therefore, you have to configure the baud rate on the Tracer SC to match the UC400.

Commissioning
The installation for this example (as shown in Figure 100) has a single Tracer SC with six BACnet
devices connected on the communication link and is terminated on each end of the link with a
Tracer BACnet Terminator.
Figure 100.BACnet Link Troubleshooting Scenario
– +
LINK 1
Tracer – +
UC-006 UC-005 UC-000 UC-003 UC-002 UC-001 LINK 1
BACnet
Terminator Tracer
Tracer SC-101
BACnet
Terminator
Tracer UC 400 Tracer

Tracer SC
BACnet BACnet
Terminator Terminator
The BACnet device in the fourth position (UC-004) has been installed on the project without it’s
rotary switches being properly set (they were left at 0,0,0, which is the factory setting).
Important: The Tracer SC and the UC400 are shipped from the factory with their rotary switches
set at (0,0,0). The Tracer SC always uses a MAC address of (0). The UC400 determines
it’s MAC address from its rotary switches. Therefore, when UC400s are installed on
a project, the rotary switches need to be reset to a specific and unique address (from
1-127). If the UC400 factory setting is not changed, the UC400 ends up with the same
MAC address as the Tracer SC (which is 0). When this happens, the token is lost on
the MasterSlave/TokenPassing (MS/TP) link.
Since there are two MAC addresses on the BACnet link that are the same, the Tracer SC will typically
discover no devices on the link. The technician should follow this process to isolate and find the
problem:
1. Per step 1 in the preliminary checkout procedure above, the technician should do the following
at the Tracer SC.
a. Check the rotary address setting on the SC.
b. Check the shield wire terminations.
c. Check the seating of the communication wiring terminal on the controller.
d. Check the polarity of the comm link.
e. Perform a tug test on each wire.
Commissioning
2. Make sure there is a Tracer BACnet Terminator at each end of the link, and that the wiring is
terminated properly.
3. Go to the middle of the link (UC-003) and check the following items. If any of these items are
improperly installed, correct the problem and rediscover using the Tracer SC (step 4 below and
refer to Figure 101):
a. Verify the rotary address setting on the UC400 (make sure it’s rotary switches match the
submittal documents—in this case UC-003). If you find switches set incorrectly, you must
change the rotary address and then cycle power on the UC.
b. Check that the shield wires are properly terminated per the wiring diagrams (and per wiring
guidelines).
Figure 101.Divide and Conquer Technique on the BACnet Link—First Jump
– +
LINK 1
Tracer – +
BACnet (address: 0,0,6) (address: 0,0,5) (address: 0,0,0) (address: 0,0,3) (address: 0,0,2) (address: 0,0,1)
Terminator Tracer
Tracer SC-101
BACnet
Terminator
UC400
4. Using Tracer SC, discover the link. In this scenario, all devices should be discovered, this means
the problem exists on the outward side (away from the Tracer SC) of UC-003.
5. Reconnect the link and move half-way farther out on the link from where it was broken in the
first jump and break the link (at UC-005)(refer to Figure 102, p. 148).
6. Per step 1 in the preliminary checkout procedure above, the technician should do the following:
submittal documents—in this case UC-005). If you find switches set incorrectly, you must
change the rotary address and then cycle power on the UC.
b. Check that the shield wires are properly terminated per the wiring diagrams (and per wiring
guidelines).

Commissioning

7. Discover the link with Tracer SC. In this scenario, the Tracer SC would fail to discover the devices
on the connected link; indicating that the problem lies between UC-005 and UC-003. Therefore,
the technician needs to relocate to UC-004.
Figure 102.Divide and Conquer Technique on the BACnet Link—Second Jump
– +
LINK 1
Tracer – +
Terminator Tracer
Tracer SC-101
BACnet
Terminator
UC400
8. Per step 1 in the preliminary checkout procedure above, the technician should do the following:
submittal documents—in this case UC-004). In this scenario, the switches are still at their
factory default setting of (0,0,0) so they need to be changed to (0,0,4).
b. Cycle power on the UC (refer to Figure 103, p. 149).

Commissioning
Figure 103.Divide and Conquer Technique on the BACnet Link—Third Jump
– +
LINK 1
Tracer – +
Terminator Tracer
Tracer SC-101
BACnet
Terminator
Change from 0,0,0 to 0,0,4
UC400
Auto-commission the Tracer VV550/551 and UC400 Controllers

The Tracer VV550/551 and UC400 VAV controllers include a special operating sequence designed
to validate the proper operation of all outputs and the ability to measure all inputs. The purpose
of this sequence is to minimize the labor required to commission the unit in the field. Full use of
this function requires the presence of an auxiliary temperature sensor configured as a discharge
air sensor and placed in the discharge air stream. Without an auxiliary temperature sensor in the
discharge air stream, fan and reheat operation cannot be validated and will not be tested. The air
handler must also be operational and making cold air, and, if using hot water heating, the boiler
must be on and operating.
For each VAV box, install an auxiliary temperature sensor, configured as a discharge air sensor,
Best in the discharge air stream to allow the most complete auto-commissioning of the VAV box.
Practice
This sequence is initiated via a command from Tracer SC’s VAS or VAV Configuration pages or from
a Trane service tool. When the auto-commissioning command is initiated from the VAV
Configuration page or a service tool, you can only initiate auto-commission on one VAV at a time.
Tracer SC’s VAS editor can auto-commission all the VAVs in the VAS at once (but staggered). The
results are stored locally in the controller. Access the results using either Tracer SC, the Rover
service tool, or Tracer TU.

Commissioning
Things to Consider Before Auto-commissioning

Before initiating auto-commissioning, be sure to consider the following:
• Is the equipment, especially the AHU, under Tracer control?
• Is the AHU making cold air?
• Is the chilled water system on?
• Is the boiler system on?
• Are fire dampers in the duct system all open?
• Is the static pressure setpoint fixed at design defaults (optimization is disabled in VAS)?
Important: A discharge air temperature sensor is required for valid auto-commissioning
temperature data.
Auto-commissioning Individual VAV Boxes with the Service Tools

Individual VAV boxes can be commissioned using the service tool.
Have the air handler making cold air under static pressure control and have hot water available
Best at the VAV box if a hot water valve is present.
Practice
Rover Service Tool-VV550/551 Controllers

Figure 104, p. 151 shows Rover’s auto-commissioning report for a VAV box.
To start the auto-commissioning sequence:
1. Select the Commissioning tab.
2. Click Start in the Auto-commissioning group.

Commissioning
Figure 104.Example of Auto-commissioning in Rover
Tracer TU Service Tool-UC400 VAV Controllers

Figure 105, p. 152 shows Tracer TU’s auto-commissioning report for a VAV box.
To start the auto-commissioning sequence:
1. Select the VAV box from the left-hand navigation.
2. Select the Equipment Utility tab along the right edge of the screen (the wrench).
3. Click 3. Commissioning from the tabs along the top.
4. Expand the Actions section.
5. Click Start.
6. The Commissioning dialog box appears. All previous commissioning reports are listed. Click
Start to begin auto-commissioning the VAV box selected in step 1.

Commissioning
Figure 105.Example of auto commissioning in Tracer TU
Auto-commissioning All VAV Boxes with Tracer SC

Trane recommends performing system checkout by exception. A quick way to see how all the VAV
boxes and the air handler in the system are performing is to run the auto-commissioning sequence
in the VAS editor. After the auto-commissioning test is run, a report can be generated, the results
can be analyzed, and problems can be addressed.
The auto-commissioning report is also an important documentation tool. It demonstrates, in
writing, that all of the components have been tested and are functioning.
If duct static pressure optimization is used, the system may not respond in time to satisfy the
Best short term high demand of the VAV during the auto-commissioning phase. Disable the duct
Practice static pressure optimization feature in the VAS editor during the auto-commissioning process.
Generate an Auto-commissioning Report

1. In Tracer SC select Reports from the left-hand navigation. The Standard Report Definition page
appears.
2. Select VAV Commissioning Report in the Report Definition Category list box.
3. Select the check box for VAS VAV Auto Commissioning.
4. Click actions... > run.

Commissioning
Figure 106.Selecting the Auto-commissioning Report
Figure 107.Selecting which VAS to Auto-commission
5. Once started the auto-commissioning function goes to each VAV box and runs it through some
operation performance tests (refer to Table Note:, p. 154) and records the results (refer to
Figure 108, p. 155). How long it takes for each VAV box depends on the configuration of the box.
VAV boxes configured with fans and heat take longer than those that do not. Auto-
commissioning follows this sequence:
a. The SC divides its VAV members into six groups (common space members are distributed
as evenly as possible among these groups).
b. The SC then staggers the command to auto-commission each VAV group by 15 minutes. The
first group begins immediately; the second group 15 minutes later; the third group 15
minutes after that, and so on. The last group begins auto-commissioning 75 minutes after
initiating the auto-commissioning command. When a particular VAV box gets the command
to auto-commission, it calibrates and then runs through a sequence of operation
performance tasks as described in Table 14

Commissioning
Note: The data generated during the auto-commissioning sequence is stored on the
controller. Tracer SC harvests this data to populate the auto-commissioning report.
New data overwrites existing data on the controller each time auto-commissioning
occurs.
Table 14. VAV Auto-commissioning sequence
Item Test action Reported Data
Turn fan and reheat off.

Stroke the air valve and modulating hot water valve (if
Position values for 40% flow
Primary air valve and airflow test present) closed and calibrate flow sensor. Then drive air
and 100% flow
valve open, record position of air valve at 40 and 100%
of cooling max airflow setpoint.
Open primary air valve to cooling max airflow setpoint

and record the discharge air temperature. Close primary
Discharge air temperature at
Fan flow air damper. Turn fan on. Monitor the discharge air
beginning and end of step.
temperature for 3 minutes or until it changes by 10
degrees F.
Open primary air valve to active minimum flow setpoint

(close primary air valve and turn on fan for fan powered
Discharge air temperature at
Local Reheat water units). Record the discharge air temperature. Open water
beginning and end of step.
valve(s) 100%. Record the discharge air temperature for
10 minutes or until it changes by 10 degrees F.
Open primary air valve to active minimum flow setpoint

(close primary air valve and turn on fan for fan powered
units). Record the discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature for
Local Reheat electric Progressively turn on each stage 30 seconds after the each stage of electric heat
previous stage until all stages are energized. Record the energized
discharge air temperature 30 seconds after each stage is
energized.
The auto-commissioning report contains the following information about the VAS air system:
• The VAV box name.
• Whether there are alarms present.
• The zone temperature and its setpoint.
• Active airflow (in cfm).
• When the VAV box was tested as part of the report.
• The air valve position when the VAV box reaches 40% of Maximum cooling setpoint.
• The air valve position when the VAV box reaches 100% of Maximum cooling setpoint.
• The discharge air temperature of the VAV box when the fan is off.
• The discharge air temperature of the VAV box when the fan is on.
• The discharge air temperature of the VAV box when the hot water heat is on (if applicable).
• If the box is equipped with electric heat, the report shows temperatures measured when one
stage of heat is turned on, when two are turned on, and when three are turned on.

Commissioning
Figure 108.Auto-commissioning sequence results
Interpreting the Auto-commissioning Report

Verifying the Air Valve Operation:
Examine the reported flow values when the air valve position at is at 40% and 100% of maximum
flow in the report. These values help the technician determine if the air valve is functioning
properly. Note that if there is insufficient static pressure being delivered by the AHU, the reported
air valve position could read 100% at maximum flow.
If the air valve reports N/A (or “---”) at both the 40 and 100 percent flows some possible causes are
(assuming the VAV box is in pressure-dependant mode):
• Failed DP sensor
• High or low pressure tube is clogged or not connected
• Flow ring is defective (high and low sides are not separated)
• There is no airflow sensor installed
• Flow sensor calibration has failed
• There is no airflow/AHU is off
Verifying Fan Operation

The auto-commissioning process is an aid in verifying proper fan operation. To accomplish this,
a fan and discharge temperature sensor must be configured and present in the VAV box. The auto-
commissioning process records the discharge temperature with the VAV air valve driven to

Commissioning
maximum flow and with the fan off. It then turns the fan on and drives the air valve closed. If the
fan runs, it draws warm plenum air in through the box and out past the discharge air temperature
sensor. A rise in the discharge air temperature indicates that the fan is operating. No change in
temperature indicates that the fan did not start.
Note: The plenum air should be warmer than the primary air source.
Verifying Reheat Operation

If a fan is present, the auto-commissioning sequence drives the air valve to closed. If no fan is
present, the air valve opens to the configured minimum local heating airflow. It then turns off the
reheat and records the discharge air temperature.
Auto-commissioning then turns on the reheat (the hot water valve is 100% open) and records a
second discharge air temperature.
Compare the two discharge air temperature readings. If the “off” temperature is below the “on”
temperature by the appropriate amount, proper operation of the reheat is inferred.
Note: If the VAV box has hot water reheat, hot water must be available at the VAV box.
Perform Air and Water Balance

The air and water balancing tool is a part of the Rover suite of software tools and Tracer TU. Testing,
adjusting, and balancing professionals can use the tool to:
• Calibrate and balance VAV boxes
• View the flow readings from VAV boxes
• Override individual or groups of VAV boxes
• Override fan control and water valves on equipment
• Create a balancing report
Use the Rover air and water balancing tool to balance the air and water flow in the system
(assuming water is being used). Refer to Trane document EMTX-SVU01“Operations: Air and Water
Balancing Tool, Rover Version 7” for detailed information on using the Rover air balancing tool.
Refer to the online help for Tracer TU for information on Air and Water Balance processes.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)

Optimize S rvice Technician

Se
Maintain
M i t i
Optimization
The Tracer SC VAS has two standard features designed to minimize overall energy consumption
of the VAV air system:
• Duct static pressure optimization
• Ventilation optimization

Duct static pressure optimization is a tool that resets the static pressure setpoint based on “real
time” system demand allowing the system to operate at the lowest possible static pressure. The
benefits are:
• Reduced operating costs because the central fan requires less power during part load
conditions.
• Reduced airflow noise during normal operation because the air dampers in the VAV boxes are
more fully open.
Static Pressure Sensor Location

The duct pressure sensor may be located anywhere along the length of the ductwork.
Install a duct static pressure sensor at the discharge of the fan. (refer to “Static Pressure Sensor
Best Location,” p. 32 for more information)
Practice
Setup Instructions for a Variable Volume Air Handler

When duct static pressure optimization is enabled in the Tracer SC VAS, the VAS writes the static
pressure setpoint to the VAV AHU at the VAS priority (level 10).
Note: If ventilation optimization is not enabled, the static pressure setpoint should be released
from VAS control on the Variable Volume Air Handler, Configuration page in Tracer SC.

Optimization
Setup Instructions for an MP580/581 Air Handler

The MP580 must be programmed to use the “nviDuctStatPress” LonTalk network variable input.
Refer to “Tracer Graphical Programming (in the MP580/581 using Rover),” p. 57 for further
instructions on programming the MP580/581 controller.
Tracer SC VAS Duct Static Pressure Optimization Setup

Trane recommends waiting until after the system is balanced and commissioned before adjusting
these values.
1. Select Systems > from the Tracer SC left-hand navigation.
2. On the Systems list page, select the desired VAS from the variable air systems list.
3. Click Function (either at the bottom or top of the page).
Figure 109. Setup for duct pressure optimization in the VAS editor
Minimum operating pressure
VAS uses this value if

optimization is disabled (also
referred to as the “design”
pressure.
Maximum operating pressure

allowed (often equal to the
“design” pressure.
Values used to determine

when to raise and lower the
static pressure setpoint
If the system static pressure

causes ANY air valve position
in the VAV boxes to exceed the
maximum air valve
position setting, then the
static pressure setpoint is
adjusted up by the value in the
increment field.
If the system static pressure
The increment is the amount The interval is the point at causes ALL the valve
the static pressure an be which the static pressure positions in the VAV boxes to
raised or lowered for each setpoint is re-evaluated. fall below the maximum air
interval. valve position setting, then
the static pressure setpoint is
The Status box displays adjusted down by the value in
useful information about the the increment field.
active duct static pressure
conditions in the VAS.

Optimization
4. Validate the maximum duct pressure setpoint with the air balancer. The default duct pressure
setpoint is the duct pressure an AHU must maintain in order for all VAVs to supply their design
airflow at peak capacity.
5. Verify that the Enable Duct Pressure Optimization check box is selected.
Figure 110 shows the relation between the airflow and the position of the air valve in the
VAV box. The graph shows that as the air valve begins to open and as it approaches 100%
open, the airflow only increases in small increments. Most of the airflow variation occurs
when the air valve is between 20% and 80% open. In this area of the graph, airflow
increases roughly 2% for every 1% of modulation by the air valve. In order to implement
the optimization routine most effectively, it is important to select limits that are still within
the “dynamic range” of the damper.
Figure 110. Best practices for VAV air valve position limits
Recommended settings:
High limit = 75%
Flow increases 2% for every 1% Low limit = 65%
of damper movement
Maximum
Airflow
Dynamic range
0
20% 80% 100%
VAV air valve position
Ventilation Optimization
Ventilation optimization is a tool that calculates the system outdoor air requirement based on “real
time” conditions in the spaces (i.e., number of occupants, CO2 levels, etc.) minimizing the amount
of unconditioned outdoor air that must be brought into the building. The benefit is reduced
operating costs because less outdoor air must be conditioned (heated, cooled, humidified, or
dehumidified) by the air handler while insuring that ventilation air reaches the zones where it is
needed.
Ventilation optimization can be divided into two areas: zone level action which takes place at the
VAV box, and system level action that takes place at the air handler.

Optimization
Zone Level Action

At the zone level, there are four basic ventilation strategies supported by the Trane controller. The
four strategies are:
• Fixed ventilation
• Occupancy-based ventilation
• CO2-based, demand-controlled ventilation
• Scheduled ventilation
Each strategy is set up a bit differently, and one or more strategies can be combined on a single
system. The following four sections describe exactly what is required to support each strategy.
Strategy #1: Fixed Ventilation

Fixed ventilation, also known as design ventilation, is based on the design occupancy of the zone.
The mechanical engineer will often calculate the ventilation requirements of a zone based on the
peak occupancy plus an additional constant ventilation component based on the square footage
of the zone (also referred to as the building component of ventilation).
Outdoor airflow requirement = (people outdoor air rate x design # of occupants) + (area outdoor
air rate x zone square footage).
If a zone is designed for 24 people, then the ventilation rate will be set based on 24 people. The VAV
box will use this ventilation setpoint whenever its operating mode is Occupied. Even at times of
partial occupancy (i.e., only 15 people are in the zone instead of 24), the ventilation rate remains
at design.
Example (IP): Fixed ventilation for a classroom designed to hold 24 students:
• 1 Classroom = 400 ft.2
• people outdoor air rate = 10 cfm/person (based on ASHRAE 62.1)
• design # of occupants = 24
• people component = 10 x 24 = 240 cfm
• area outdoor air rate = 0.12 cfm/sq. ft. (based on ASHRAE 62.1)
• building component = 0.12 x 400 = 48 cfm
• Occupied setpoint = 240 + 48 = 288 cfm
• Occupied standby setpoint = 48 cfm (the building component)
Example (SI): Fixed ventilation for a classroom designed to hold 24 students:

• 1 Classroom = 37.16 m2.
• people outdoor air rate = 4.72 L/s per person (based on ASHRAE 62.1)
• design # of occupants = 24
• people component = 4.72 x 24 = 113.28 L/s
• area outdoor air rate = 0.6 L/s per m2 (based on ASHRAE 62.1)
• building component = 0.6 x 37.16 = 22.60 L/s
• Occupied setpoint = 113.28 + 22.60 = 135.88 L/s
• Occupied standby setpoint = 22.60 L/s (the building component)
Strategy #2: Occupancy-based Ventilation

This type of ventilation strategy requires a hardwired occupancy sensor on the controller.
Configure the controller's binary input for Occupancy using the Rover or Tracer TU service tool.
During Occupied hours, when people are detected in the space, the controller uses the “Occupied
Ventilation” setpoint. During Occupied hours, when people are not detected in the space (Occupied
Standby), the controller uses the “Occupied Standby Ventilation” setpoint.

Optimization
When the occupancy mode of the VAV is Occupied Standby (the building is occupied but the zone
is unoccupied), the zone only requires the building component of the ventilation rate. Under these
conditions, the VAV uses the “Occupied Standby Ventilation” setpoint
Important: Occupied Standby Ventilation setpoint. The Occupied Standby Ventilation
setpoint is the amount of outdoor air required to ventilate a zone during Occupied
hours when no people are present (i.e., an empty conference room). Refer to
ASHRAE 62.1 for detailed information.
Refer to the previous example for details on calculating the setpoints.
Setup for Fixed and Occupancy-based Ventilation Strategies for VV550/551

Controllers
To implement using the Rover service tool:
1. Select the VAV box to configure from the navigation tree.
3. Select the Setup tab, the fields are in the Ventilation Setup group.
Note: Refer to the Flow Setpoints worksheet provided by the Trane project engineer (if
available) for the value of both the occupied and occupied standby setpoints on each of
the VAV boxes (see an example on p. 240).
Figure 111. Ventilation Setup setpoints (example shown in IP units)
Setup for Fixed and Occupancy-based Ventilation Strategies for UC400

Controllers
To implement using the Tracer TU service tool:
1. Select the VAV box to configure from the left-hand navigation.

Optimization
Figure 112. Tracer TU ventilation setup setpoints (example shown in SI units)
Strategy #3: CO2-based Demand Controlled Ventilation

Trane’s CO2-based ventilation strategy is an enhancement of the occupancy-based ventilation
strategy. In this strategy, the active ventilation setpoint modulates between the occupied
ventilation and occupied standby ventilation setpoints; it is reset based on CO2 levels in the space.
(Figure 113, p. 162).
Figure 113. Minimum ventilation rate based on CO2 level
Occupied
Ventilation Setpoint
Outdoor Air
Minimum Outdoor air

setpoint
Minimum ventilation for
building and people
Occupied Standby
Ventilation Setpoint
Minimum ventilation
for building only
Space CO2 Measured CO2 Level Space CO2

Low Limit High Limit
CO2 Level

Optimization
This ventilation strategy requires a communicated CO2 input to the Tracer controller from either
a local binding (e.g., nviSpaceCO2), or from Tracer SC. When using Tracer SC, create a TGP2
program (using the Tracer TU service tool) that will read the Space CO2 Concentration from another
source (such as an MP580 universal input) and then write it to the VAV Space CO2 Concentration
BAS point (refer to “Tracer SC Setup for VAV boxes with communicated CO2 values,” p. 163).
Trane’s CO2-based, demand-controlled ventilation strategy is cost effective for the customer
because it only places CO2 sensors in locations with widely varying occupancy patterns and
population densities (i.e., conference rooms, break rooms, classrooms, cafeterias, etc.).
The values used to determine the CO2 setpoint are configured using either Tracer SC or the Rover
service tool (refer to Figure 114, p. 163).
Space CO2 Low Limit

The space CO2 low limit (refer to Figure 114, p. 163) should be set equal to the outdoor CO2
concentration level because the CO2 level in the space cannot be less than the CO2 level of the
outdoor air. Outdoor air usually has a CO2 concentration between 300 and 450 ppm. If the actual
outdoor CO2 level is unknown, use the default value of 300 ppm.
Space CO2 High Limit

The space CO2 high limit (Figure 114, p. 163) should be set equal to the allowable indoor CO2
concentration level at the design conditions. Refer to Engineer’s Newsletter, volume 34-5, CO2-
based, Demand-Controlled Ventilation for more information.
Figure 114. Ventilation and space CO2 setup in Rover
Tracer SC Setup for VAV boxes with communicated CO2 values

To set up a ventilation optimization strategy based on CO2 levels, you need to perform the following
steps:
1. In Tracer SC, select Spaces from the left-hand navigation and click on a VAV box listed below
the space where you want to set up this strategy.
3. In the Ventilation section, look for the Space CO2 Concentration BAS point (refer to
Figure 115). By default this point is always out of service (indicated by ).
4. Click the check box for this point and click actions... > place in service. The icon
disappears when the point is in service.
5. Once in service, the VAV box will think that there are 400 ppm of CO2 in the space (which is the
current value for this point).

Optimization
Figure 115. Space CO2 Concentration BAS point
6. Using Tracer TU, create a TGP2 program that reads the value from the actual CO2 sensor being
used and writes it to this point (refer to Figure 116). This TGP2 program must be set to run no
less than every 5 minutes. In this example TGP2 program, the Analog Value would be replaced
by the point that contains the actual CO2 value (which may be wired to an MP580 or some other
device).
7. Once created, download this program into the Tracer SC.
Figure 116. CO2 Concentration BAS point TGP2 program
Important: The UC400 controller also supports a hardwired CO2 sensor. When using a
hardwired sensor, it is not necessary to place the Space CO2 Concentration BAS
point in service or in the TGP2 program described above.
Strategy #4: Scheduled Ventilation

Scheduled ventilation is based on an estimate of how many people are in a space at any given time.
In Tracer SC, a schedule controls the operating mode of an analog value to indicate how many
people are in the space at any given time. A TGP2 program calculates the outdoor air requirement
(refer to TGP2 program “Ventilation_Calc.tgp,” p. 166).
Example: Classroom 101 requires a minimum of 48 cfm (22.60 L/s) of ventilation air to
account for emissions from carpeting, furniture, etc. (Occupied Ventilation Standby
setpoint). During Occupied hours, an additional 10 cfm (4.70 L/s) of ventilation air is
required per person. The cfm requirements for Classroom 101 are shown in Table 15,
p. 165

Optimization
Table 15. Classroom 101 cfm requirements

Hours Number of Occupants OA Requirement (cfm (L/s))
8 AM - 9 AM 1 58 (27.40)
9 AM - 12 PM 24 288 (135.90)
12 PM - 1 PM 0 48 (22.60)
1 PM - 3 PM 24 288 (135.90)
3 PM - 5 PM 1 58 (27.40)
5 PM - 8 AM Unoccupied 0 (0)
Setup for scheduled ventilation:

8. Create an analog value point named “Number of Occupants” (for this example, set a minimum
value of 0, a maximum value of 30, and a default value of 0).
9. Create an analog schedule.
10. Add events to the schedule for each scheduled change of occupancy. Schedule the value of the
event based on the information in Table 15 (refer to Figure 117, p. 165).
Figure 117. Adding set analog values to the schedule
11. Add the analog value to the analog schedule.

12. Create the TGP2 program (shown in Figure 118, p. 166) to control the Ventilation Setpoint BAS
point on the VAV box in classroom 101.
Note: To find the instance number of a device and the name of a point on that device, you can
run a site commissioning report and look up the instance and point name in the report.
You can also navigate to the device you want, click more details..., select the point and
click configuration. The name, as it will appear in TGP2, and the instance number are
available.

Optimization
Ventilation_Calc.tgp
This program (refer to Figure 118) calculates a minimum outdoor air requirement given the number
of occupants in a space and the cfm per person.
Figure 118. Ventilation_Calc.tgp2
Note: The values in this TGP2 program are for this example only. Modify the program to meet the
specific needs of your building.
Considerations for using scheduled ventilation:
1. One multi-state schedule and one multi-state value are required for each zone using scheduled
ventilation.
2. The multi-state schedule(s) must be updated when times or the number of people change.
3. CO2-based demand controlled ventilation may be a better solution.
System Level Action

In order to optimize ventilation at the VAS level, measure and control outdoor airflow, which
Best means using Traq dampers on the air handler. Refer to “Design Considerations,” p. 12 for
Practice information on selecting air handlers.
Conditioning outdoor air is expensive. To reduce costs, Trane has developed a strategy to minimize
the amount of unconditioned outdoor air brought into the building while still meeting ASHRAE
ventilation requirements. By reducing the amount of unconditioned outdoor air, the cost to
ventilate the zones is minimized both at the air handler and in reheat at the VAV boxes. This strategy
is known as ventilation optimization.
The ventilation optimization program in the Tracer SC VAS continually calculates the corrected
outdoor airflow. This is defined as the minimum amount of outdoor air the AHU needs to deliver
to the system as defined in ASHRAE 62.1 for single-path VAV systems.
To calculate the corrected outdoor airflow, VAS must obtain several pieces of flow data from its VAV
members.
• Measured primary airflow. The VAV property associated with this value is the “Nominal
Airflow Status” point.
• Effective ventilation setpoint. The VAV property associated with this value is the
“Ventilation Setpoint” point.
• Ventilation ratio. The VAV property associated with this value is the “Ventilation Ratio” point.

Optimization
Note: Because some of this flow data can only be provided by the controllers, the ventilation
optimization strategy requires the use of Trane controllers.
The example on the following pages describes how the ventilation optimization program works.
Figure 119. Effective ventilation setpoints for each VAV box (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
VAV 200 cfm
Return Air
zone 1
Supply Air
VAV 300 cfm
zone 2
VAV 200 cfm
zone 3
Effective Ventilation Setpoint
Figure 119 shows a scenario where an air handler supplies airflow to three zones, each equipped
with a Trane-controlled VAV box. Each VAV box must supply a minimum amount of ventilation air,
which is determined by the selected zone-level ventilation strategy discussed earlier in this section.
Zone 1 needs 200 cfm(94.39 L/s), zone 2 needs 300 cfm(141.60 L/s), and zone 3 needs 200 cfm (94.39
L/s). The Tracer SC VAS determines the minimum outdoor air requirements for the system based
on the needs of each of the zones.
Note: The ventilation optimization program ignores a VAV’s active ventilation setpoint at times
even when it is a non-zero value (i.e., when the Heat/Cool Mode Status mode is Test,
Calibration, Max Heat, or Off). The controller goes into test mode under a variety of
situations, but most commonly during air valve overrides and during auto-commissioning.

Optimization
Figure 120. Measured primary airflow required for each zone (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
Supply Air = 2300 cfm
VAV 400 cfm
Return Air
zone 1
VAV 900 cfm
zone 2
VAV 1000 cfm
zone 3
Measured Primary Airflow
Figure 120 shows the measured primary airflow for each zone. This is the amount of air required
to satisfy the temperature setpoints. In the example, zone 1 is delivering 400 cfm (188.80 L/s), zone
2 is delivering 900 cfm (424.80 L/s), and zone 3 is delivering 1000 cfm (471.90 L/s).

Optimization
Figure 121. Finding the critical zone (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
Critical Zone
200 cfm
VAV = .5 (50%)
400 cfm
Return Air
zone 1
300 cfm
VAV = .33 (33%)
900 cfm
zone 2
200 cfm
VAV = .2 (20%)
1000 cfm
zone 3
Effective Ventilation Setpoint

Measured Primary Airflow
The controller calculates a ventilation ratio for each zone by dividing the effective ventilation
setpoint by the measured primary airflow (refer to Figure 121). Zone 1 needs 50% outdoor air, zone
2 needs 33% outdoor air, and zone 3 needs 20% outdoor air.
Because zone 1 requires a larger percentage of outdoor air than zones 2 or 3, it becomes the critical
zone. As a result, the outdoor air dampers could be controlled to maintain a mixture of 50% outdoor
air (1150 cfm (542.70 L/s)) in the supply (refer to Figure 122).
Figure 122. Uncorrected outdoor airflow (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
1150 cfm
All three zones are now adequately ventilated; however, it supplies more outdoor air than is
required by ASHRAE 62.1. The reason for this is that zones 2 and 3 are both receiving 50% outdoor
air, which is more than they require.

Optimization
The ASHRAE 62.1 standard includes equations to calculate the amount of unconditioned outdoor
air required (Vot) by accounting for the unused outdoor air in the return:
Vot = Vou / (1 + Xs – Zd)
where:
Vot = the outdoor airflow required at the system intake.
Vou = the “uncorrected” outdoor air intake flow.
Xs = the average fraction of outdoor air required.
Zd = the critical zone ventilation ratio.
Using the example above, the results would be:
(with IP units) (with SI units)
Vou = 200 + 300 + 200 = 700 cfm Vou = 94.4 + 141.6 + 94.4 = 330.4 L/s
Xs = (200 + 300 + 200) / (400 + 900 + 1000) Xs = (94.4 + 141.6 + 94.4) / (188.8 + 424.8 + 471.9)
or Xs = 0.304 or Xs = 0.304
Zd = 0.50 Zd = 0.50
Vot = 700 / (1 + 0.304 – 0.50) Vot = 330.4 / (1 + 0.304 – 0.50)
or Vot = 870 cfm or Vot = 410.9 L/s
As a result, the required amount of outdoor air obtained through the outdoor air dampers is
reduced to 870 cfm(410.9 L/s)(Figure 123).
Figure 123. Corrected outdoor airflow (shown with IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
870 cfm
Once the ventilation optimization program calculates the corrected outdoor airflow value, it must
be communicated as the minimum flow setpoint to the VAV air handler.

Optimization
Sending the Minimum Flow Setpoint to the VAV Air Handler

If using an IntelliPak or AH540 air handler:
When you add the air handler to the VAS as an air handler member, Tracer SC VAS automatically
controls the outdoor air minimumflow setpoint to the corrected outdoor airflow value at priority
level 14.
Figure 124. VAS writing to the outdoor air minimum flow setpoint at priority level 14
If using an MP580/581 on the air handler with Traq dampers or outdoor air flow
monitoring:
• Tracer SC VAS calculates the corrected outdoor air flow setpoint and writes the value to the
analog value point “VentOptOaSetpointCorrected|VAS-1”.
• The MP580/581 DAC profile does not support the nviMinOAFlowSP LonTalk variable; therefore,
you must communicate the outdoor air minimum flow setpoint using a Tracer Summit analog
variable in the MP580/581.
• Use the small TGP2 program in the Tracer SC (refer to Figure 126, p. 172) to read the
VentOptOaSetpointCorrected|VAS-1 value in Tracer SC and write to the Tracer Analog Variable
“Outdoor Airflow Setpoint” in the MP580/581 (refer to Figure 125).
Figure 125. Data flow for OA flow setpoint from Tracer SC VAS to the MP580/581
Tracer SC MP580/581
VAS Tracer Summit

Analog Variable
“OA Flow Setpoint”
“ventOptOaSetpointConnected|VAS-1”
Analog Variable
(created by VAS)
ce
n
re
fe
Re
TGP2
“TrAV/3-Analog Var 03 (Summit)|dac/1”

Analog Output
(created by Equipment)

Optimization
Setup
1. Program the MP580/581 using a DAC profile.
Important:All VAV air handlers controlled using MP580/581 controllers must be programmed
using a DAC profile.
Use Trane Pre-Packaged Solutions programs.

Best
Practice
2. Program the MP580/581 to use a “Tracer Summit Analog Variable” for the Minimum OA Flow
Setpoint.
3. Install the MP580/581 in the Tracer SC.
4. Create the VAS in the Tracer SC
5. Add the MP580/581 to the VAS as an air handler member.
6. Create and download the outdoor air flow TGP2 program on the Tracer SC (using Tracer TU).
Figure 126. TGP2 program for OA air flow setpoint when using an MP580/581
Ventilation Ratio Limits

In the example (p. 167 to p. 170), the amount of unconditioned outside air the air handler needed
to supply was calculated to be 870 cfm (410.9 L/s) or approximately 37.8% of the total air supplied
to the system. On a normal day, most air handlers can typically condition between 40 and 50% of
outside air, so the outside air requirement is not a problem.
What if the air handler cannot condition the required percentage of outside air? Design engineers
typically select an air handler with the capability of providing a maximum of 25% outdoor air at
design. If the outdoor air temperature is extremely cold, the safeties on the unit may limit the
amount of outdoor air the unit can bring in, the freeze stat may nuisance trip, or coils may freeze
in the unit. If the outside air temperature is very hot, or humid, the air handler may not be able to
sufficiently cool or dehumidify the air, resulting in overheated spaces and indoor air quality
problems. In either case, the amount of outdoor air must be restricted and the VAV boxes made
aware of this limitation.

Optimization
Ventilation Ratio Limit of the AHU

The AHU ventilation ratio limit of the air handler is set using the AHU Maximum Percentage of
Outdoor Air point (VAS > Functions > Ventilation Optimization) (Figure 2, p. 178). This value
prevents the VAS from requesting a higher AHU percentage of outdoor air (OA) than the AHU can
provide to the supply air stream based on the capacity of the AHU and current outdoor weather
conditions.
Use the default value of 40%.

Best
Practice
Figure 127. Ventilation optimization AHU ventilation ratio limit
While this field limits the percentage of outdoor air the VAS requests from the air handler, it does
not prevent the VAV boxes from asking for a greater percentage of outdoor air than the system can
deliver (refer to “Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV” below).
Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV

The Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV works in conjunction with the Ventilation Ratio Limit of the
AHU to provide two functions:
• It minimizes the energy consumption of the VAV system.
• It prevents the VAV box from asking for a greater percentage of outdoor air than the system can
deliver.
Minimizing energy consumption
Minimizing the total energy consumption in a VAV system requires a proper balance between the
amount of energy applied at the air handler to condition the fresh outdoor air, and the amount of
energy applied at the VAV box in the form of reheat (refer to Figure 129).
Figure 128. Ventilation optimization VAV ventilation ratio limit

Optimization
Figure 129. System energy consumption curve
High
Energy Used (kWh)
Low
25% 50% 60% 75%
% of Ventilation Air
Increases energy used in Increases energy used in

the zone for reheat the AHU for preheat,
cooling, dehumidification
Note: As the percentage of outdoor air decreases, the VAV box must increase the total airflow to
the space to maintain the ventilation ratio. This increase in airflow leads to over-cooling and,
consequently, the need for reheat.
Based on energy analysis simulations, to minimize total system energy consumption, Trane
Best recommends that the amount of outdoor air supplied to the critical zone be between 50% and
Practice 60% of the total airflow. The default value is 60%.
Limiting the critical zone outdoor air request

The VAV Ventilation Ratio Limit (now set in the SC editor using the “VAV Maximum Percentage of
Outdoor Air Request) sets the maximum value that can be reported by the Ventilation Ratio Calc
property of the VAV boxes to the VAS, preventing the critical zone VAV box from asking for a greater
percentage of outdoor air than the system can deliver.
Example 1: Figure 130 shows the same system we used previously with different cooling loads.
Zone 2 is now the critical zone, and its measured primary airflow is approaching the effective
ventilation setpoint. The resulting calculated ventilation ratio of the critical zone is 75%, which
exceeds the current Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV of 60%.

Optimization
Figure 130. Example 1, VAV ventilation ratio limit (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
1387 cfm
1387 cfm of outdoor air

(approximately 50%) exceeds 200 cfm Critical
the capacity of the air handler. VAV = .15 (15%) Zone
1350 cfm
zone 1
Return Air
300 cfm
VAV = .75 (75%)
400 cfm
zone 2
200 cfm
VAV = .2 (20%)
1000 cfm
zone 3
Min OA Requirement
Total Air Flow Required for the zone
Problem: If the critical zone is allowed to request 75% outdoor air, two things will occur:
1. The energy consumed by the VAV system will be higher than necessary because it will now be
operating outside the optimal energy consumption range as shown in Figure 129 on page 174.
2. The zone will be under-ventilated, because the corrected outdoor air requirement of 1387
cfm(654.6 L/s) (50% of the total airflow) exceeds the Ventilation Ratio Limit of the AHU value,
which is set at 40%. As discussed earlier in this section, the Ventilation Ratio Limit of the AHU
restricts the amount of outdoor air the air handler can provide in the total supply airflow.
Solution: Set the Ventilation Ratio Limit of each VAV to 60% (default), which will do the following:
• prevent the system from operating outside the optimal energy consumption range (refer to
Minimizing energy consumption on p. 173).
• limit the ventilation ratio of the critical zone to a maximum value.
How the Ventilation Ratio Limit of each VAV is applied
1. Initially, each VAV box calculates the ventilation ratio and the VAS uses this information to
determine the critical zone. In example 1, the ventilation ratio of 75% establishes zone 2 as the
critical zone.

Optimization
Figure 131. Determining the critical zone
200 cfm Critical

r. VAV = .15 (15%) Zone
1350 cfm
zone 1
Return Air
300 cfm
VAV = .75 (75%)
400 cfm
zone 2
200 cfm
VAV = .2 (20%)
1000 cfm
zone 3
Min OA Requirement
Although the ventilation ratio of 0.75 is used to establish the critical zone, it cannot be
used to determine the corrected percentage of outdoor air in the system supply (refer to
the equations on p. 170) because the value exceeds the Ventilation Ratio Limit for each
VAV (0.60).
Figure 132. Ventilation optimization VAV ventilation ratio
When the critical zone requests a higher ventilation ratio than the Ventilation Ratio Limit
for each VAV allows, the value for the Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV (60%= 0.60)
replaces the ventilation ratio (0.75) of the critical zone.
2. The VAV box recalculates the total airflow required for the zone in order to satisfy the Minimum
OA Requirement of the critical zone. Refer to “Zone Level Action,” p. 160 for details on
calculating the ventilation requirement.

Optimization
Figure 133. Recalculating total airflow (shown in IP units)

zone 1
Return Air
300 cfm
VAV = 0.60
??? cfm
zone 2
To satisfy the equation, the VAV box must increase the total airflow delivered to the Zone because
the value for the Min OA Requirement cannot change.
(with IP units) (with SI units)
0.60 = 300 cfm/Total Airflow Delivered to Zone 0.60 = 141.60 L/s per Total Airflow Delivered to Zone
Total Airflow Delivered to Zone = 300 cfm/0.60 Total Airflow Delivered to Zone = 141.60 cfm/0.60
Total Airflow Delivered to Zone = 500 cfm Total Airflow Delivered to Zone = 236.00 L/s
Figure 134. Example 2, Zone-affected minimum flow setpoints (shown in IP units)
Exhaust
AHU
Unconditioned
Outdoor Air
1084 cfm
200 cfm
VAV = .15 (15%) Critical Zone

1350 cfm
zone 1 Return Air
300 cfm
VAV = .60 (60%)
500 cfm
zone 2
200 cfm
VAV = .2 (20%)
1000 cfm
zone 3
Min OA Requirement

Optimization
Using the equations discussed on p. 170, the corrected outdoor airflow at the air handler is now
1084 cfm (511.6 L/s), which is 38% of the total airflow and the zone is now properly ventilated with
supply air containing a lower concentration of outdoor air.
Default Ventilation
The startup airflow setpoint is used during the initial air handler startup allowing time for the air
system to stabilize.
The length of time the system uses this value is called the transitional delay, which is twice the value
specified in the Reset Interval: field (refer to Step 4). When the Reset Interval expires, the system
uses the corrected outdoor airflow setpoint (refer to “System Level Action,” p. 166 for a discussion
on how the system calculates this value).
ASHRAE 62.1 specifies an outdoor air rate of 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.35 L/s per m2) for most spaces.
Best To calculate the startup airflow setpoint, multiply the (total square footage of the zone(s) being
Practice
served by the air handler) x 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.35 L/s per m2).
Ventilation Optimization Setup

To configure the Tracer SC VAS, follow these steps:
1. Select Systems > Variable Air Systems from the left-hand navigation. Select the specific VAS
from the list, and then the Functions page. The Ventilation Optimization information is on the
lower half of the page. Refer to Figure 135.
Figure 135. Ventilation optimization group
2. Verify that the Ventilation Optimization is Enabled (Currently list box).

3. Set the startup airflow setpoint as determined by the best practice.
4. Set a value in the Reset Interval: field (default is 15 min.). The reset interval indicates how often
(in minutes) the required system outdoor airflow is recalculated.
5. Save the VAS
Use the following default values:

Best • Ventilation Ratio Limit of the AHU = 40%
Practice • Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV = 60%

Optimization
Ventilation Optimization Status

The status group under Ventilation Optimization shows the current status of the ventilation
optimization including three values that can be refreshed using the refresh button. They are:
Next ventilation reset in X minutes. This value shows the amount of time remaining until the
next ventilation reset occurs.
Maximum VAV vent ratio. This is the maximum ventilation ratio reported from VAV boxes that
are enabled for ventilation optimization reset.
Maximum vent ratio source. The name of the VAV box that reported the maximum ventilation
ratio.
Ventilation Optimization Enhancement

The Vent_Ratio_Limit.TGP2 program may be used to reset the ventilation ratio limit value based
on outside air temperature. To accomplish this, reference the associated analog outputs controlled
by the Vent_Ratio_Limit.TGP2 program to the respective fields in the editor.
Example: To prevent the coils from freezing in an AHU on a building in St. Paul, MN, reset the
ventilation ratio limit per the reset schedule in Table 16.
Table 16. Ventilation ratio limit reset schedule

Outdoor Air Temperature 0°F 50°F 65°F 75°F
Ventilation Limit Ratio 25% 40% 40% 25%
The ventilation ratio limit for the AHU is fixed at 25% when the outdoor air temperature is below
0°F or above 75°F, and fixed at 40% when the outdoor air temperature is between 50°F and 65°F
(Figure 136). The ventilation ratio limit modulates from 25% to 40% between 0°F and 50°F and 65°F
and 75°F.
Figure 136. FG_Ventilation ratio limit reset curve
60% VAV Limit

Ventilation Ratio Limit
20% Differential
40%
AHU Limit
25%
0°F 50°F 65°F 75°F
Outdoor Air Temperature
The Ventilation Ratio Limit of each VAV should be set 20% higher than the Ventilation Ratio Limit
Best of the AHU.
Practice

Optimization
Setup
1. Create two analog output points in Tracer SC.
2. Reference the first analog output from the Ventilation Ratio Limit of the AHU: field in the VAS
editor.
3. Reference the second analog output from the Ventilation Ratio Limit for each VAV: field in the
VAS editor.
4. Control the operating mode of the analog outputs using the custom program
Vent_Ratio_Limits (refer to p. 180).
5. Modify the CPL program Vent_Ratio_Limits to use the objects in your database.
PROGRAM Vent_Ratio_Limits
This routine calculates the ventilation ratio limit of the AHU and the ventilation ratio limit for each
VAV based on the outdoor air temperature and air handler capacity. The ventilation ratio limit for
the AHU ranges from a minimum of 25% to a maximum of 40% and is limited if the outdoor air
temperature falls below 50°F or rises about 65°F. The corresponding ventilation ratio limit for each
VAV is then calculated to be 20% higher than the ventilation ratio limit of the AHU.
Figure 137. Vent_Ratio_Limits.TGP2

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commissio
Commiis n Building Operator
BAS Technician
Operate
Maintain
Special Applications
This section describes enhancements to the basic VAS system to accommodate situations where
more specific control is beneficial or required.
• Dedicated ventilation systems. A separate outdoor air handling unit supplies ventilation air
to the building with VAV boxes controlling the ventilation airflow into various parts of the
building. This section describes how to set up a basic dedicated ventilation system, including
setting up the VAV box as a ventilation flow controller.
• Flow tracking. Maintains a positive or negative space pressure by controlling the airflow into
and out of the space. This section describes how to set up a pair of VAV boxes to work together
in a flow tracking application.
Dedicated Ventilation Systems

What is a Dedicated Ventilation System?
A dedicated ventilation system is designed to supply ventilation air to other air handlers within the
building when the operating mode of any of the building’s Areas are Occupied or Optimal Stop.
Important: Do not use a dedicated ventilation system for Night Economizing as this is not a
ventilation function
A dedicated ventilation system (refer to Figure 138, p. 182) consists of a dedicated outdoor air VAV
air handler, ductwork, and either shutoff VAV boxes (no reheat) or VAV boxes (with electric reheat)
configured for ventilation flow control (VFC).
Important: When using a VAV box equipped with electric heat as a VFC box, an auxiliary
temperature sensor must be installed in the discharge air stream
Equipping the VAV box with electric heat allows it to pre-heat cool/cold outdoor air brought into
a building for ventilation reducing the load on the other AHUs.
Important: Do not use VAV boxes with hot water reheat in a dedicated ventilation system,
because there is no freeze protection built into the application.

Figure 138. Dedicated ventilation system
100% AHU
Outdoor Air 100% Outdoor Air Unit
mechanical
room VAS 5 common
( )
(16) space
VAS 6 VFC AHU VAV VAV
(1) (4)
CSC (w/LCI-I)
Floor 5
mechanical
room VAS 4 common
( )
(16) space
VFC AHU VAV VAV

(1) (4)
CSC (w/LCI-I)
Floor 4
mechanical
Dedicated Ventilation room VAS 3 common
( )
(16) space
VFC AHU VAV VAV

(1) (4)
CSC (w/LCI-I)
Floor 3
mechanical
room VAS 2 common
( )
(16) space
VFC AHU VAV VAV

(1) (4)
CSC (w/LCI-I)
Floor 2
mechanical
room VAS 1 common
( )
(16) space
VFC AHU VAV VAV

(1) (4)
CSC (w/LCI-I)
Floor 1
VFC boxes
In a dedicated ventilation system, the VAV boxes are configured for ventilation flow control (VFC
boxes) one of three applications supported by the Tracer VV550/551 and the UC400 controller
(Space Temperature Control and Flow Tracking Control are the other two). Use the Rover or Tracer
TU service tool to configure the VAV controllers for VFC.
Figure 139, p. 183 shows the typical components installed on a VAV box with a VV550/551 or UC400
controller configured as a VFC box in a dedicated ventilation system.

Figure 139. VFC box
Electric Heat Discharge Temperature

(optional) Sensor (required with
Air Valve electric heat)
Outdoor Air
from AHU VFC Box To Floor VAS
Flow Ring VAV

controller
Aux
Setting up a dedicated ventilation system

These instructions are based on the following example (refer to Figure 138, p. 182):
Example: The 5-story Stone Enterprises building has a Self-Contained VAV system on
each floor consisting of one VAV Commercial Self Contained (CSC) air handler (w/LCI-I)
and 20 VAV boxes. A dedicated ventilation system, consisting of one air handler and 5
VAVs, provides 100% outdoor air to a mechanical room on each floor of the building.
1. Lay out the building

For simplicity, assume that each of the five floors has one tenant and one schedule. This allows us
to create one Area per floor (including the mechanical room). Each Area has 17 VAV members:
• 1 VAV box configured as a VFC box in the mechanical room
• 16 VAV boxes serving the tenant spaces
• 4 VAV boxes serving the bathrooms, hallways, and conference rooms and designated as
common space VAV boxes.
2. Install the VAVs and AHUs (in Tracer SC)

a. Install one variable volume air handler for the dedicated outdoor air handler (refer to “Install
and Set Up the Variable Air Volume Equipment Types,” p. 73).
b. Install one variable volume air handler for each of the five floor air handlers (refer to “Install
and Set Up the Variable Air Volume Equipment Types,” p. 73).
c. Install 105 VAV boxes (refer to “Select Members,” p. 77).
3. Create a VAS for the dedicated ventilation system

a. Create one VAV Air System for the dedicated ventilation system.
b. Assign the following members to the dedicated ventilation system VAS:
• One 100% outdoor air unit (AHU member)
• Five VAV boxes (VAV members, which are not designated as common space VAVs). These
VAV boxes must be configured for Ventilation Flow Control.
• In VAS VAV Configuration, select each VAV box and include it in duct pressure
optimization (select the check box).

Do not define any common spaces for a dedicated ventilation air system. If additional boxes are
Best required to handle the minimum airflow of the supply fan, use TGP2 to override an additional
Practice VFC box.
c. Verify that duct static pressure optimization is enabled in VAS Configuration.

d. Disable ventilation optimization for the dedicated ventilation system.
4. Create a VAS for each floor

In each floor VAS, add the VFC box as a ventilation member. The dedicated ventilation VAS
monitors the operating mode of each floor’s VFC box. This provides a link between the dedicated
ventilation VAS to each floor VAS. So if the VAS from any floor transitions from Unoccupied to
Occupied, the dedicated VAS also transitions to the Occupied mode (refer to Figure 140).
a. Create one VAV Air Systems for each floor of the building (5 total). Refer to “Add the Area
to an HVAC Schedule,” p. 108.
b. Assign the following members to each “floor” VAS:
• One air handler as the AHU member (CSC with LCI-I).
• 16 VAV boxes as VAV members
• 4 VAV boxes as VAV members (designated as common space members).
• One VFC VAV box as a ventilation member.
c. For each floor VAS verify ventilation optimization and duct pressure optimization check
boxes are checked.
Figure 140. VFC box as ventilation member of each Floor VAS
common
space
Floor 5
VFC VAS VAV VAV
(1) (16) (4)
VAS 6
AHU not shown
AHU not shown
common
space
Floor 4
VFC Area VAV VAV
(1) (16) (4)
AHU not shown
common
space
Floor 3
VFC VAS VAV VAV
(1) (16) (4)
AHU not shown
5. Set up the VAV controllers on the VFC boxes

Complete the following steps for each of the VFC boxes:
In TGP2, read the analog value of the VAS: “ventOptOaSetpointCorrectedRef” and write the value
to the analog output of the VAV box: “VentilationSetpointRequestBAS”. Refer to Figure 138, p. 182.

Figure 141. Example TGP2 Program for Dedicated Ventilation
6. Service Tool Setup for VFC VAV boxes

a. If equipped with electric heat, enter the value for the minimum airflow required while the
electric heat is ON (per the ship-with literature) using the appropriate service tool.
Note: Active airflow setpoint
The ventilation setpoint is used when reheat is not active. The Local Heat Minimum
Airflow setpoint is used when reheat is active and it has a higher value than the
Ventilation setpoint.
b. Set the Maximum Air Flow setpoint field equal to the value in the Occupied Ventilation field
on the Configuration tab.
c. Set the Minimum Air Flow setpoint field equal to the value in the Occupied Standby
Ventilation field on the Configuration tab.
Steps “b” and “c” make the VFC boxes behave like other VAV boxes in the system, which makes
Best air balancing easier.
Practice
The value for both the Occupied Ventilation setpoint and the Occupied Standby Ventilation
setpoint should have been determined by the project engineer and filled in on the Controller
Flow Settings Worksheet (refer to “Appendix A: Controller Flow Settings Worksheet,” p. 239).
d. If the VFC boxes are equipped with electric reheat, select the Configuration tab. Verify the
Auxiliary Heat Control field is set to Enabled. Do not reference this field to another property.

7. Set up the VAV AHU controller for the dedicated VAS

a. Add the VAV AHU to the dedicated VAS as an AHU member.
b. When using MP580/581s, the DAC profile must be active and the DAC Profile -
nviDuctStaticSP variable must be used in the TGP2 programming.
8. Set up the VAV AHU controller for each floor VAS

a. Add the VAV AHU to the floor’s VAS as an AHU member.
b. When using MP580/581s, the DAC profile must be active and the DAC Profile -
nviDuctStaticSP variable must be used in the TGP2 programming.
9. Create Areas
Create Areas and add VAV boxes.
a. Create five Areas (one Area for each floor of the building). Refer to “Set Up Areas,” p. 75.
b. For each floor Area, assign the 16 VAV boxes in the tenant space as "Heating/Cooling"
members.
10. Create Schedules

a. Create one schedule for each Area. Refer to “The Schedule Times page appears (Figure 68).
The current date displays as the default Start Date in the Specify Effective Dates group.
Choose the Start Date and End Date for your HVAC schedule.,” p. 111.
b. Assign the Areas as members of the appropriate schedule.

Flow Tracking
Flow tracking, commonly applied in hospitals and labs, is used to maintain a positive or negative
pressure in a space relative to adjoining spaces. Space pressure is maintained by controlling
airflow into and out of a space using two VAV boxes (a space temperature control box on the inlet
and a flow tracking box on the outlet).
Maintaining Positive Space Pressure

Positive space pressure is typically maintained in rooms where external contaminants must be
prevented from entering. A surgical suite is a good example.
To positively pressurize a space, more air must flow in than is allowed to leave. (refer to Figure 142).
The inlet VAV box controls the amount of air allowed into the space based on temperature. The
outlet VAV box “tracks” the incoming airflow and limits the amount of air leaving the space using
a fixed offset (i.e., 100 cfm less than the inlet VAV box). The difference in airflow results in a positive
space pressure.
Figure 142. Positive pressure flow
Space Temp Flow Tracking

Control Box Box
Positive pressure air flow
VAV VAV
Supply Air Return Air
Inlet Outlet
Flow is
300 cfm Flow is
200 cfm
Space Temp
Sensor
Flow Tracking Space
Maintaining Negative Space Pressure

Negative space pressure is typically maintained in rooms where internal contaminants must be
prevented from leaving. A lab testing infectious diseases is a good example.
To negatively pressurize a space, more air must flow out than is allowed to enter. (refer to
Figure 143). The inlet VAV box controls the amount of air allowed into the space based on
temperature. The outlet VAV box “tracks” the incoming airflow and allows more air to leave the
space using a fixed offset (i.e., 100 cfm more than the inlet VAV box). The difference in airflow
results in a negative space pressure.

Figure 143. Negative pressure flow
Space Temp Flow Tracking

Control Box Box
Negative pressure air flow
VAV VAV
Supply Air Exhaust Air
Inlet Outlet
Flow is
200 cfm Flow is
300 cfm
Space Temp
Sensor
Flow Tracking Space
How to Set It Up
Setup for a flow tracking system is the same as setting up a standard VAV air system (refer to
“Tracer SC Application Setup for Variable Air Systems,” p. 72 for detailed information). The space
temperature control box on the inlet to the room is just like a normal VAV box described throughout
this manual. The only difference is the setup required for the additional VAV boxes in each
temperature-controlled space that track the incoming airflow.
Set up the flow tracking boxes (when using VV550/551 controllers)

For each flow tracking VAV box:
Use the Rover service tool (in the active mode) to bind:
Binding
nvoAirFlow nviAirFlowSetpt
This binding communicates the airflow through the space temperature control VAV box
to the flow tracking VAV box.
1. Set the Tracking Offset
• positive value for negative room pressure
• negative value for positive room pressure
2. Set the cooling maximum and minimum airflow setpoints as follows:
Positive room pressure (Negative Flow Tracking Offset)
• Maximum Air Flow Setpoint = Main Box Max Flow - Tracking Offset value
• Minimum Air Flow Setpoint = Main Box Min Flow - Tracking Offset value
Negative room pressure (Positive Flow Tracking Offset)
• Maximum Air Flow Setpoint = Main Box Max Flow + Tracking Offset value
• Minimum Air Flow Setpoint = Main Box Min Flow + Tracking Offset value

Note: The Rover service tool will not allow the setpoints to be less than 10% of nominal flow
because the transducer used to measure the air flow requires a nominal flow greater than
10% of the design airflow.
Set up the flow tracking boxes (when using UC400 controllers)

We are assuming the UC400 has not been configured at the factory as a flow tracking VAV box
controller. The procedure below describes the tasks required to configure a UC400 in the field for
flow tracking.
For each flow tracking VAV box:
1. Connect to the UC400 using a USB direct connection and launch the Tracer TU service tool.
Note: You can also connect via the IMC bus, but the USB direct connection is recommended.
2. Select Utilities > Equipment and click the 4. Configuration tab. The VAV and vestibule
control page appears (refer to Figure 144).
Figure 144. FG_TitleAcrossCol
3. In the Application Selection section, select Flow Tracking in the Profile list box.
4. In the Equipment Options section, select the appropriate Box Size and Air Damper Opens
parameters for the VAV box being configured.
5. Click Save.
6. Click the 2. Setup Parameters tab.

Figure 145. Setup Parameters page in Tracer TU
7. Set the Air Flow Offset value.

• use a positive value for negative room pressure
• use a negative value for positive room pressure
8. Install the UC400 into the Tracer SC.
Important: Flow tracking boxes cannot be assigned as members of an Area or VAS.
Note: The space temperature control boxes will be assigned to a VAS as per normal best
practices.
9. In Tracer SC, create an analog input to read the air flow (cfm or L/s) coming from the space
temperature control VAV box.
Important: Creating an analog input allows you to set the update interval to a defined
frequency (e.g., 10 seconds).
10. In Tracer TU, create a TGP2 program that writes the value from the analog input created in
Step 9 previously and writes it to the Air Flow Setpoint BAS point in the flow tracking VAV box
(refer to Figure 146, p. 191).

Figure 146. Flow tracking setup.
UC400 on a UC400 on a
Space Temperature Control Tracer SC
Flow Tracking VAV Box
VAV Box
Referenced by Air Flow Setpoint BAS

Discharge Air Flow Value
Analog Input
TGP2 Program Reads

the AI and writes
the value to

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commission
n Building Operator
BAS Technician
BA
Operate
Maintain
Maintenance
This section gives some ideas on:
• How to use auto-commissioning. Using the auto-commissioning tool to generate a report
and isolate non-performing or under-performing VAV boxes, which can save time in
troubleshooting and can give the customer some indication of the overall condition of their
system.
• Manual output testing.
Auto-commissioning
Important: Detailed information on initiating and using auto-commissioning is available in the
section titled “Preliminary Checkout for BACnet Communication Links,” p. 144.
Auto-commissioning provides a means to quickly evaluate the condition of the VAV air system by
putting each VAV box through a special operating sequence as part of a routine maintenance
program. Figure 147 presents an example of an auto-commissioning report.

Maintenance
Figure 147.Auto-commissioning sequence results
Manual Output Testing for VV550/551 Controllers

The manual output test (see Table 17, p. 194) verifies output and end device operation. Use it to
verify output wiring and actuator operation without using the Rover service tool. Also use it during
air balancing or water balancing.
The manual output test terminates when it has advanced completely through the test sequence or
when the controller times out as a result of remaining in a single step for one hour. The outputs
are not subject to minimum times during the test sequence. However, the test sequence only
permits one step per second, which enforces a minimum output time.
All diagnostics other than the following are ignored during manual test:
• Ventilation flow control, freeze protection (low discharge air temperature)
• Low airflow diagnostic (this diagnostic will prevent local electric reheat)

Maintenance
Table 17. Manual Output Test

Air Valve Air Valve Heat 1/ Water Heat 2/ Water Heat 3 / Fan
Step(a) Close Open Valve Close Valve Open On/Off
1. Off(b) Off Off Off Off Off/Off
2. Air Valve Open(c) Off Off Off Off Off/Off
3. Air valve stops opening, fan

Off Off Off Off Off/On
turns on
4. Heat 1 turns on/water valve
Off Off On Off Off/On
closes
5. Heat 1 turns off, Heat 2 turns
Off Off Off On Off/On
on/water valve opens
6. Heat 2 turns off, Heat 3 turns
Off Off Off/On Off On/On
on/water valve closes
7. Heat 3 turns off, air valve
On Off Off Off Off/Off(d)
closes, fan turns off
8. Exit(e)
(a) The manual output test won't start if the controller has an invalid unit configuration
(b) On activating the manual output test function, all outputs are turned Off or closed. The green status LED blinks in a one blink pattern during the manual
output test if no diagnostics are present. The green status LED blinks in a two-blink pattern during the manual output test if a diagnostic is present.
(c) At the beginning of step 2, the controller attempts to reset all diagnostics. The low airflow diagnostic prevents local electric reheat from energizing. A
ventilation flow controller with a freeze protection active diagnostic will not run the manual output test.
(d) A series fan stays On until the air valve is closed.
(e) After the last step, the test sequence performs an exit. This initiates a reset and attempts to return the controller to normal operation.
The procedure for testing is:

1. Press and hold the Test button on the VAV box controller for at least three seconds. The green
status LED turns Off, confirming the Test button was pressed.
2. Release the Test button to start the manual output test. The manual output test is in step one.
The green status LED is blinking in one of two patterns. If the green status LED blinks once, no
diagnostics are present. If the green status LED blinks twice, diagnostics are present.
3. Press the Test button (no more than once per second) to advance through the test sequence.
Test steps are not skipped. For example, if the unit does not have Heat 3, advancing to step 6
has no effect, but you still must advance to step 6 before advancing to step 7.
Alternatively, the service override mode enables the Rover service tool to override all outputs
over the communications network. This mode is useful for water balancing, air balancing, test,
and commissioning. The implementation mimics the manual output test.

Maintenance
Initiating the Test

To initiate the manual output test for an air handler or VAV box from the Rover service tool
1. Click the Test tab to open the Manual Output Test page.
2. Click Start to conduct a manual output test. Rover will initiate each of the outputs identified for
the air handler (open and close dampers, valves, etc.)
3. As each output test is completed, click Next Step to advance to the next output test. If possible,
be close to the air handler or have someone close enough to observe whether each output test
is successful.
Important: Remember that not all the safeties are enabled during the manual output test, so be
careful. The following safeties ARE enabled during the manual output test:
• Duct static pressure high limit
• Low supply fan airflow
• Low temp detect
• Unit shutdown
Manual Output Testing for UC400 Controllers

The UC400 does not have a manual output test built into the product.

Design
BAS Technician(s)
Install
BAS Technician(s)
Commissio
Commiis n Building Operator
BAS Technician
Operate
Maintain
Troubleshooting
This section provides information for troubleshooting the system after installation and during
routine maintenance, which includes:
• Scenarios outlining the proper sequence of operation for the system under specific conditions.
• How to isolate problem VAV boxes and remove them from the VAS until they’re fixed.
• Charts for both the VAV box and air handler equipment showing the input received from the
SC, the output sent over the network, and the expected result at the device.
Make sure to follow the best practices outlined in previous sections as you find and fix problems
in the VAV Air System.
Note: While the SC supports other manufacturers equipment, the sequences in this section are
written for Trane equipment only.
Sequences of Operation for Standard Operating Modes

The following common applications have a defined sequence of operation when working within
the confines of a Tracer SC VAS:
• Normal start
• Optimal start
• Humidity pull-down
• Unoccupied
• Optimal stop
• Unoccupied heat/cool
• Night purge
• Unoccupied dehumidify
• Unoccupied humidify
• Timed override
• Comm Loss

Troubleshooting
General Assumptions
For the following scenarios to work properly, the assumption is the system is set up a certain way
and some basic best practices have been followed. The following list summarizes those general
settings and best practices. Where there are assumptions specific to a scenario, they are listed at
the beginning of that particular scenario.
Scheduling
Each Area is a member of an HVAC schedule.
Area
• Area Heat/Cool Input: = Auto
• Reference the following fields on the Area Configuration page:

– Reference the Space Temperature Sensor field to the pre-defined referencer for average
space temperature.
– Reference the Space Humidity Sensor field to the humidity sensor installed within the Area.
– Reference the Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor field to the pre-defined referencer for the
Facility Outdoor Air Temperature.
– Reference the Outdoor Air Humidity Sensor field to the pre-defined referencer for the Facility
Outdoor Air Humidity.
• Each VAV box should be defined as a Heating/Cooling Member Type (regardless of whether the
VAV box has the capability to provide heat).

Troubleshooting
• Each VAV box should have the desired functions enabled on the Member Configuration page.
VAV box
All of these items are configured using the service tool (either TU or Rover).
• Configured for space temperature control.
• Auto calibrate is enabled (check box IS selected)(applies to VV550/551 controllers only).
• Star and double star (*/**) is not enabled (check box is NOT selected)(applies to VV550/551
controllers only).
• auto changeover setpoint = 80°F.
VAS
• All of the VAV boxes are members—both normal and common space VAVs.
• A variable volume air handler is the AHU member.
• AHU Startup Delay = 2 min.
• Common space shutdown delay = 5 min.
• On the VAV Box Configure Members page, select which functions each VAV box will participate
in and whether the VAV box is a common space VAV box.

Troubleshooting
AHU Object
• Create a TGP routine to read the VAS average space temperature and send it to the air handler’s
space temperature VAS.
Air Handler
• Configured as a VAV.
• The Space Temperature BAS, on the air handler’s Configuration page (Sensors sections), is in
service. To place this in service:
1. Select the Space Temperature BAS check box.
2. Click actions....
3. Select place in service from the menu.

Troubleshooting
Optimal Start (Cooling Mode)

The system goes into this mode when the Area space temperature is warmer than the Area
occupied cooling setpoint, it is prior to the occupied start time, and there is an Optimal window
defined in Scheduling and the current time is within that time window.
Assumptions
This sequence of operation assumes the following settings are in place (beyond the general
assumptions stated at the beginning):
• Area Heat/Cool mode status = Cooling
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule and Optimal Stop/Start is enabled (check box is selected)
• An Optimal window is created in the HVAC schedule.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Optimal Start mode in a cooling only scenario.
Where it’s happening What it’s doing

Unit
(Software) (Hardware) Operation Sequence
Scheduling 1. Scheduling and Area are coordinating Optimal Start.
Area 2. Area decides how early to enable the system based on the Area setpoint for the
cooling mode (Calculated Occupied Cooling Setpoint), the space temperature
(Space Temperature Sensor), and the optimal cooling start rate
(startupcoolrate).
3. At the startup time determined in the previous step, controls the operating
mode of all cooling only and heating/cooling VAV members to Optimal Start at
the Area priority level.
4. Ventilation and heating members are Unoccupied or disabled.
Note: Refer to “Appendix E: Equipment Response to Operating Modes,” p. 245
VAV object 5. The operating mode controls the following values to the VAVs at the Area
priority level:
• Occupancy Request = Occupied
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (each VAV box Heat
Cool mode request is determined by comparing its space temperature to its
space temperature setpoint (the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS value is
located on the Configuration page (select equipment > configure)). If the
space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the space
temperature is below the setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-up.)
Note: The local space temperature setpoint (thumbwheel) is not used to
determine the Heat Cool Mode Request for optimal start.

Troubleshooting

Unit
VAV box 6. The VAV box receives the following values from the VAV object:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (based on Step 5).
7. The VAV box damper modulates to maintain the active space temperature
setpoint.
8. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is based on the heat or cool
control action of the VAV box.
• Heating control action: If the source temperature is above the auto
changeover setpoint.
• Cooling control action: If the source temperature is below the auto changeover
setpoint minus 10°F.
Note: When the AHU starts, the discharge air might be hot, but it should
cool as the AHU ramps up.
9. Reheat and parallel fans are disabled if the VAV box is in Precool.
VAS 10. VAS detects that the operating mode of its VAV members and:
• controls the operating mode of common space VAV members to Optimal
Start at the VAS priority level.
• controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to Optimal
Start at the VAS priority level (there is a time delay(a) in VAS to allow time for
the common space VAV boxes to open).
• AHU Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (the Heat Cool
mode request is determined by comparing the VAS average space
temperature to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint (located on the Configuration
page of the VAS). If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC
sends PreCool. If the space temperature is below the setpoint, the SC sends
Morning Warm-up.
11. Ventilation functions are disabled.
AHU 12. The operating mode controls the following values to the AHU at the VAS
priority level:
object • Occupancy Request = Occupied
• Minimum OA Damper Position = 0%
• Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint = 0 (cfm or L/s)
• Economizer Enable = Release
AHU 13. The AHU receives the following values from the VAV AHU object:
14. The AHU begins producing cool air(b).
(a) The length of this delay is adjustable. This is located on the Systems > VAS > Configuration page. Set the time in the Air Handler
Startup Delay field.
(b) There may be a time delay here depending on the AHU type.

Troubleshooting
Optimal Start (Heating Mode)(Central Heat Used/Local Heat Not Used

or Not Present)
The system goes into this mode when the Area space temperature is colder than the Area occupied
heating setpoint (minus 1°F to transition), it is prior to the Occupied start time, and there is an
Optimal window defined in Scheduling and it is within that time window. Additionally, there is a
heat source in the AHU with no local heat source in the VAV boxes (or the local heat source is not
being used).
Typical Example: The Area space temperature is 65°F and it needs to warm it up so it gets to
72°F just as the building is Occupied at 8:00 AM. So Warm-up begins at 7:00 AM. The air handler
is configured with gas heat and the VAV boxes are configured with electric heat. It is most cost
effective to use the gas heat for Warm-up, so the auxiliary electric heat in the VAV box is disabled
during Warm-up.
Assumptions
This sequence of operation assumes the following settings are in place:
• Area Heat/Cool mode status = Heating
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule and Optimal window is defined.
• The check box for “Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night” is NOT selected on the Tracer SC
VAS configuration page.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Optimal Start mode in a heating with central
heat and no local heat scenario.

Tracer SC Unit
Controller
(Software) Operation Sequence
(Hardware)
heating mode (Calculated Occupied Heating Setpoint), the space temperature
(Space Temperature Sensor), and the optimal heating start rate
(startupheatrate).
mode of all heating only and heating/cooling VAV members to Optimal Start at
4. Ventilation members are disabled.

Troubleshooting

Tracer SC Unit
Controller
(Hardware)
priority level:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool or Max Heat (each
VAV box Heat Cool mode request is determined by comparing its space
temperature to its Space Temperature Setpoint BAS value. If the space
temperature is above the setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the space
temperature is below the setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-up.)
• The Heat Cool Mode Request is Max Heat if the AHU reports that it is in the
constant volume fan mode.
6. The VAS controls the Auxiliary Heat Control point to Disabled at the VAS priority
(refer to Step 12).
VAV Box 7. The VAV box receives the following values from the VAV object:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool or Max Heat (based
on step 5).
8. If in Max Heat mode, the VAV object opens its damper to the Maximum Heat
Airflow setpoint.
9. If not in Max Heat, the VAV box damper modulates to maintain the active space
temperature setpoint. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is
based on the heat or cool control action of the VAV box.
• Cooling control action: If the source temperature is below the auto
changeover setpoint minus 10°F.
• Reheat and parallel fans are disabled if the VAV box is in Precool.
10. The VAV box also receives the following value from the VAS (refer to Step 5
above).
• Auxiliary Heating Enabled = Disable (refer to assumption 5 on p. 202).

Troubleshooting

Tracer SC Unit
Controller
(Hardware)
• controls the operating mode of the common space VAV members to Optimal
Start at the VAS priority level.
Morning Warm-up.
12. The VAS also controls the auxiliary heat at all the VAV boxes, including the
common space VAV boxes, by sending the following value to the VAV object:
object
AHU 15. The AHU receives the following values from the AHU object:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool.
16. The AHU begins supplying hot or neutral air(b) based on the active space
temperature it receives from Tracer SC(c) and the VAS Startup Setpoint.
• Active space temperature is below the VAS Startup Setpoint then the AHU
supplies Hot air (if the air handler is running in the constant volume mode,
it will report Max Heat to the VAS. The VAS then controls the Heat/Cool Mode
Request of all the VAV members to Max Heat at the VAS control priority
level.)
• Active space temperature is above the VAS Startup Setpoint then the AHU
supplies Cold or Neutral air
(c) There are several choices available for this value. The first choice is probably the VAS average space temperature with the second
choice being the VAS minimum space temperature.

Troubleshooting
Optimal Start (Heating Mode)(Local Heat with a Central Fan)

The system goes into this mode when the Area space temperature is colder than the Area occupied
heating setpoint (minus 1°F to transition), it is prior to the Occupied start time, and there is an
Optimal window defined in Scheduling and it is within that time window. Additionally, there is little
or no heat source in the AHU with a local heat source in the VAV boxes.
Typical Example: The Area space temperature is 65°F and it needs to warm it up so it gets to 72°F
just as the building is Occupied at 8:00 AM. So Warm-up begins at 7:00 AM. The air handler has
no heat and the VAV boxes are configured with hot water reheat.
Assumptions
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule and Optimal window is defined.
• The check box for “Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night” is selected on the Tracer SC VAS
configuration page.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Optimal Start mode in a heating with local heat
and a central fan scenario.

Tracer SC Unit Controller
heating mode (Calculated Occupied Heating Setpoint), the space temperature
(Space Temperature Sensor), and the optimal heating start rate (Optimal Start
Heating Rate).
mode of all heating only and heating/cooling VAV members to Optimal Start at

Troubleshooting

priority level:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool or Max Heat
• Morning Warm-up or PreCool is determined by comparing the space
temperature of the Area equipment members to the setpoint sent to the
unit by the Tracer SC Space Temperature Setpoint BAS point. If the space
temperature is above the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends PreCool. If the
space temperature is below the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends Morning
Warm-up.
• The Heat Cool Mode Request is Max Heat if the AHU reports that it is in the
constant volume fan mode.
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool or Max Heat (based
on Step 4).
6. If in Max Heat mode, the VAV object opens its damper to the Maximum Heat
Airflow setpoint.
7. If not in Max Heat, the VAV box damper modulates to maintain the active space
temperature setpoint. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is
based on the heat or cool control action of the VAV box.
Note: When the AHU starts, the discharge air might be hot, but it should cool
as the AHU ramps up.
8. The VAV box also receives the following value from the VAS (refer to Step 10).
• Auxiliary Heating Enabled = Enable (value is 100)(refer to assumption 4 on
p. 205).

Troubleshooting

• controls the common space VAV members operating mode to Optimal Start
at the VAS priority level.
Morning Warm-up.
• Auxiliary Heating Enabled = Enable (refer to assumption 4 on p. 205).
AHU object 12. The AHU receives the following values from the VAV AHU object:
14. The AHU begins supplying hot or neutral air(b) based on the heat/cool mode
request it receives from Tracer SC.

Troubleshooting
Humidity Pull-down
The system goes into this mode when the Area space humidity is higher than the Area occupied
humidity setpoint, it is prior to the occupied start time, and there is an Optimal window defined in
Scheduling and it is within that time window.
Assumptions
This sequence of operation assumes the following settings are in place (beyond the general
assumptions stated at the beginning):
• Area Heat/Cool mode status = Cooling
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule and Humidity Pull-down is enabled (check box is selected)
• An early start limit must be set (greater than 0 minutes) that defines the earliest time that a
Humidity Pull-down event can occur.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Humidity Pull-down mode in a cooling only
scenario.

Scheduling 1. Scheduling and Area are coordinating Humidity Pull-down.
cooling mode (Occupied Humidity Setpoint), the space humidity (Space
Humidity Sensor), and the humidity pull-down rate (Humidity Pulldown Rate).
mode of all cooling only and heating/cooling VAV members to Humidity Pull-
down at the Area priority level (if they have dehumidification enabled).
priority level:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (each VAV box Heat
Cool mode request is determined by comparing its space temperature to its
Space Temperature Setpoint BAS value (located on the Configuration page
of the equipment). If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC
Morning Warm-up.)

Troubleshooting

VAV box 6. The VAV box receives the following values from the VAV object:
setpoint.
8. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is based on the heat or cool
control action of the VAV box.
• Cooling control action: If the source temperature is below the auto changeover
setpoint minus 10°F.
9. Reheat and parallel fans are disabled if the VAV box is in Precool.
• controls the operating mode of the common space VAV members to
Humidity Pull-down at the VAS priority level.
• controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to Humidity
Pull-down at the VAS priority level (there is a time delay(a) in VAS to allow
time for the common space VAV boxes to open).
page). If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC sends PreCool.
If the space temperature is below the setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-
up.
AHU 12. The operating mode controls the following values to the AHU at the VAS
priority level:
object

Troubleshooting
Normal Start
The best practice is to use Optimal Start. However, if not using Optimal Start, the Normal Start
works as described here. The ventilation functions in both the VAV box and the air handler are
enabled during a Normal Start, which is the major difference between a Normal Start and an
Optimal Start, where ventilation functions in both the VAV box and the AHU are disabled.
Assumptions
• There is no Optimal window defined in the HVAC schedule for this Area, or the current time has
reached the start of the schedule.
• The schedule must be an HVAC schedule.
Sequence of Operation.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Normal Start mode.

Scheduling 1. The schedule tells Area to go Occupied.
Area 2. Area controls the operating mode of all VAV members to Occupied at the Area
priority level.
priority level:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Release
Note: The VAV box Heat/Cool mode is determined by the priority array, where
the highest level mode (lowest number) is applied when control is
released (e.g., a TGP program may also be controlling the Heat/Cool
mode).
Occupied at the VAS priority level.
• controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to Occupied at
the VAS priority level (there is a time delay(a) in VAS to allow time for the
common space VAV boxes to open).

Troubleshooting

AHU object 6. The AHU receives the following values from the VAV AHU object (at the VAS
priority level):
• Minimum OA Damper Position = Release
• Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint = Release
AHU 7. The AHU receives the following values from the AHU object (at the VAS priority
level):

Troubleshooting
Optimal Stop
Optimal stop is a scheduled function, but it is also a temperature-based function of Area. Optimal
stop is the process of efficiently stopping the mechanical heating or cooling in advance of the space
going into an Unoccupied mode. Because this is an Occupied condition, the air handler and fan
continue to run and the outdoor air damper is set to allow minimum outdoor air into the air handler.
Assumptions
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule and Optimal Stop/Start is enabled (check box is selected)
The following steps occur in the order shown during Optimal Stop mode.

Scheduling 1. Scheduling and Area are coordinating Optimal Stop.
Area 2. Area determines the actual time to control the operating mode of VAV
boxes to Optimal Stop based on the space temperature sensor, the
occupied cooling/heating setpoint plus/minus 2°F (1.1°C), and the
associated optimal stop rate.
3. At the time determined in the previous step, Area controls the operating
mode of all VAV members to Optimal Stop at the Area priority level.
4. Ventilation members are enabled.
Note: Refer to “Appendix E: Equipment Response to Operating Modes,”
p. 245
VAV object 5. The operating mode controls the following values to the VAVs at the the
Area priority level:
• Occupancy Request = Standby
VAV Box 6. The VAV box receives the following values from the VAV object (at the VAS
priority level):
• Occupancy Request = Standby
7. The VAV box damper modulates to maintain the standby space
temperature setpoint.
8. Ventilation functions are enabled.

Troubleshooting

VAS 9. VAS detects that the operating mode of its VAV members has changed and:
Optimal Stop at the VAS priority level.
Stop at the VAS priority level.
AHU object 11. The AHU object sends the following values to the AHU (at the VAS priority
level):
13. The AHU behaves as it does when Occupied.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied
Assumptions
• An HVAC schedule is created, which defines Occupied and Unoccupied times.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied mode.

Scheduling 1. The HVAC schedule tells Area to go Unoccupied.
Area 2. Area controls the operating mode of all VAV members to Unoccupied at the
Area priority level.
priority level:
• Occupancy Request = Unoccupied
VAV Box 5. The VAV box receives the following values from the VAV object (at the Area
priority level):
6. It auto-calibrates on the transition from Occupied to Unoccupied.
7. It uses its unoccupied setpoints(a).
9. It disables local heat for all VAVs depending on the VAS settings.
Unoccupied at the VAS priority level. (b)
• controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to
Unoccupied at the VAS priority level.
12. The VAS also sends the following command to the VAV object.
• Auxiliary Heat Control Request = Enabled (value is 100) (The check box
for “Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night” is selected on the Tracer
SC VAS Configuration page).

Troubleshooting

AHU object 13. The AHU object sends the following values to the AHU (at the VAS priority
level):
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Off
• Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint = 0
• Economizer Enable = Disabled
15. The AHU is Off.
(a) The best practice for this may vary depending on the VAV box/heat type.
(b) Does not occur until the shutdown delay expires.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Cooling Mode1

The hot Sunday in Phoenix scenario #1
Assumptions
• The HVAC schedule is unoccupied
• The VAV box unoccupied cooling setpoint should be set higher than the Area unoccupied
cooling setpoint.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied Heating/Cooling mode when
cooling.

Scheduling 1. The HVAC schedule is unoccupied.
Area 2. The Area operating mode is Unoccupied

3. Area compares its Space Temperature with its Unoccupied Cooling
Setpoint.
a. When the Area Space Temperature is above its Unoccupied Cooling
Setpoint (typically 85°F (29.4°C)), the Area operating mode transitions
to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling.
b. When the Area Space Temperature falls below the Unoccupied Cooling
Setpoint minus the unoccupied differential (typically 4°F (2.2°C)), the
Area operating mode transitions back to Unoccupied, so it shuts off at
81°F (27.2°C)).
4. When the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied Heating/
Cooling, it controls the operating mode of all cooling only and heating/
cooling VAV members to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling at the Area priority
level.
1 The industry sometimes refers to this function as the Night Setback mode
Troubleshooting

VAV object 6. The operating mode controls the following values to the VAV boxes at the
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up, PreCool, or Max Heat
(the Heat Cool mode request is determined by comparing the space
temperature of each of the Area equipment members to the Space
Temperature Setpoint BAS value sent to the unit by the Tracer SC. If the
space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the
space temperature is below the setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-
up.)
• The Heat Cool Mode Request is Max Heat if the AHU reports that it is in
the constant volume fan mode.
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (based on Step
6).
setpoint.
9. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is based on the heat or
cool control action of the VAV box.
10. Reheat and parallel fans are disabled if the VAV box is in PreCool.
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling at the VAS priority level.
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling at the VAS priority level (there is a time
delay(a) in VAS to allow time for the common space VAV boxes to open).
• AHU Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (the Heat
Cool mode request is determined by comparing the VAS average space
temperature to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint on the Configuration
page of the VAS. If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the SC
sends PreCool. If the space temperature is below the setpoint, the SC
sends Morning Warm-up.

Troubleshooting

AHU object 13. The operating mode controls the following values to the AHU at the VAS
priority level:
11).
(a)The length of this delay is adjustable. This is located on the Systems > VAS > Configuration page. Set the time in the Air Handler Startup Delay field.
(b)There may be a time delay here depending on the AHU type.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with Central Heat

Typical scenarios:
• Installations with an AHU equipped with gas heat/electric heat, and with perimeter heat in
the space (such as electric baseboard heaters), but with no heat in the VAV boxes.
• Installations where the AHU is equipped with hot water or a steam coil, and VAV boxes with
electric heat.
Assumptions
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule.
• The check box for “Allow VAVs to use auxiliary heat at night” is NOT selected on the Tracer SC
VAS configuration page.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied Heating/Cooling mode in a
scenario where the system is heating with central heat and not using local heat.


3. Area compares its Space Temperature with its Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint.
a. When the Area Space Temperature is below its Unoccupied Heating
b. When the Area Space Temperature rises above the Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint plus the unoccupied differential (typically 4°F (2.2°C)), the Area
operating mode transitions back to Unoccupied, so it shuts off at 64°F
(17.8°C)).
Cooling, it controls the operating mode of all heating only and heating/
level.

Troubleshooting

priority level:
– Morning Warm-up or PreCool is determined by comparing the
space temperature of each of the Area equipment members to the
Space Temperature Setpoint BAS of each member sent to the unit
by the Tracer SC. If the space temperature is above the setpoint,
the Tracer SC sends PreCool. If the space temperature is below the
setpoint, the Tracer SC sends Morning Warm-up.
7. The VAS controls the Auxiliary Heat Control point to Disabled (value of 0)
at the VAS priority (refer to Step 12).
(based on Step 6).
9. If in Max Heat mode, the VAV object opens its damper to the Maximum
Heat Airflow setpoint.
10. If not in Max Heat, the VAV box damper modulates to maintain the active
space temperature setpoint. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum
airflow is based on the heat or cool control action of the VAV box.
changeover setpoint minus 10°F (5.6°C).
Note: When the AHU starts, the discharge air might be hot, but it
should cool as the AHU ramps up.
11. The VAV box also receives the following value from the VAS.

Troubleshooting

temperature to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint (located on the
Configuration page of the VAS). If the space temperature is above the
setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the space temperature is below the
setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-up).
common space VAV boxes, by sending the following value to the VAV
object:
AHU object 15. The AHU object sends the following to the VAV AHU:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (If the VAS
Average Space Temperature is above the VAV AHU Startup
Temperature, the value is PreCool. If the VAS Average Space
Temperature is below or equal to the VAV AHU Startup Temperature, the
value is Morning Warm-up)(based on Step 12).

Troubleshooting

• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (If the VAS
Average Space Temperature is above the VAV AHU Startup
Temperature, the value is PreCool. If the VAS Average Space
Temperature is below or equal to the VAV AHU Startup Temperature, the
value is Morning Warm-up)(based on Step 12).
17. The AHU begins supplying hot or neutral air(b) based on the active space
temperature it receives from Tracer SC(c) and the VAS Startup Setpoint.
• Active space temperature is below the VAS Startup Setpoint then the air
handler supplies Hot air (if the air handler is running in the constant
volume mode, it will report Max Heat to the VAS. The VAS then controls
the Heat/Cool Mode Request of all the VAV members to Max Heat at the
VAS control priority level.)
• Active space temperature is above the VAS Startup Setpoint then the air
handler supplies Cold or Neutral air
(a)The length of this delay is adjustable. This is located on the Systems > VAS > Configuration page. Set the time in the Air Handler Startup Delay field.
(b)There may be a time delay here depending on the AHU type.
(c)There are several choices available for this value. The first choice is probably the VAS average space temperature with the second choice being the VAS minimum
space temperature.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with Local Heat and

a Central Fan
Typical scenarios:
Installations with an AHU equipped with a central fan but no heat, and with VAV boxes with reheat
(no fans).
Assumptions
• Area is part of an HVAC schedule.
configuration page.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied Heating/Cooling mode in a
heating with local heat and a central fan scenario.


3. Area compares its Space Temperature with its Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint.
a. When the Area Space Temperature is below its Unoccupied Heating
b. When the Area Space Temperature rises above the Unoccupied Heating
Setpoint plus the unoccupied differential (typically 4°F (2.2°C)), the Area
operating mode transitions back to Unoccupied, 64°F (17.8°C).
Cooling, it controls the operating mode of all heating only and heating/
level.

Troubleshooting

priority level:
Space Temperature Setpoint BAS sent to the unit by the Tracer SC.
If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends
PreCool. If the space temperature is below the setpoint, the Tracer
SC sends Morning Warm-up.
(based on Step 6).
8. If in Max Heat mode, the VAV box opens its damper to the Maximum Heat
Airflow setpoint.
9. If not in Max Heat, the VAV box damper modulates to maintain the active
space temperature setpoint. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum
airflow is based on the heat or cool control action of the VAV box.
10. The VAV box also receives the following value from the VAS (refer to Step
11).

Troubleshooting

• Controls the operating mode of the common space VAV members to
• VAS sends the following to all of its VAV members: Auxiliary Heating
Enabled = Enable (refer to assumption 3 on p. 223).
• Controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to
• The VAS also controls the AHU Heat Cool Mode Request to Morning
Warm-up or PreCool (the Heat Cool mode request is determined by
comparing the VAS average space temperature to the VAV AHU Startup
Setpoint (located on the Configuration page of the VAS). If the space
temperature is above the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends PreCool. If the
space temperature is below the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends Morning
Warm-up.
p. 245
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Morning Warm-up or PreCool (based on
Step 11).
Step 11).
15. The AHU begins supplying air to the space.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling—Heating Mode with

Local Heat and No Central Fan for Night Heat
Typical scenarios:
• AHU without heat and the building owner wants to use the reheat in the VAV boxes (and fans)
instead of the AHU central fan for unoccupied heating.
• AHU without heat and the building owner wants to use the VAV boxes with fans and perimeter
heat without the use of the AHU central fan.
• Do not use this scenario with shutoff VAV boxes with heat.
Assumptions
configuration page.
• The VAV box unoccupied heating setpoint is above the Area unoccupied heating setpoint.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied Heating/Cooling mode when
heating with local heat and there is no central fan for night heat.

Scheduling 1. The HVAC schedule is Unoccupied.

3. Area compares its Space Temperature with its Unoccupied Heating Setpoint.
Important: Set the Area Unoccupied Heating Setpoint to a very low setting
(e.g., 40°F). Because the Unoccupied Heating setpoint is so low,
the Area operating mode will not transition to Unoccupied
Heating/Cooling.
4. Ventilation and all VAV members are Unoccupied or disabled.
priority level:

Troubleshooting

• Heat Cool Mode Request = Off.
7. The VAV box also receives the following value from the VAS (refer to Step 13 ).
• Auxiliary Heating Enabled = Enabled (refer to assumption 1 on p. 226).
8. The VAV box uses its unoccupied setpoints (specifically, its unoccupied heating
setpoint).
10. Local heat is enabled.
11. The VAV box runs its local fan for heating.
12. The VAV box enables remote heat (perimeter heat).
VAS 13. VAS detects that the operating mode of its VAV members remains Unoccupied
and:
Unoccupied at the VAS priority level.
• controls the operating mode of the VAV air handler members to Unoccupied
at the VAS priority level.
• AHU Heat Cool Mode Request = Off
16. The VAV box uses its local heat.

Troubleshooting
Night Purge
Typical scenarios:
• This scenario works best and is used most in drier climates (e.g., Los Angeles, Phoenix, etc.).
Assumptions
• The VAV objects added as members to the Area are identified as Night Purge members.
• Area operating mode is Unoccupied
• Area must be in the cooling mode.
• Night Purge must be enabled in the Area function page.
• The Night Purge economizing decision must be true on the Area function page.
• The space temperature must be warmer than the outdoor air temperature by the Outdoor/
space Temperature Differential defined on the Area function page.
• The current time must fall within the time frame defined for Night Purge on the Area function
page.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Night Purge mode.

Scheduling 1. The HVAC schedule is Unoccupied.
Area 2. When the Area operating mode transitions from Unoccupied to Night
Purge (based on the conditions described above in Assumptions), it
controls the operating mode of all VAV members to Night Purge at the Area
priority level.
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Night Purge
6. The VAV box damper opens when the AHU goes into constant volume
mode.

Troubleshooting

VAS 8. VAS detects the operating mode of its VAV members are in Night Purge
mode and controls the following at the VAS priority level:
a. AHU object operating mode to Night Purge.
b. Common space VAV boxes to Night Purge.
• Economizer Enable = Enabled
• Economizer Enable = Enabled

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Humidify
This is not a recommended application for VAV air systems.

Troubleshooting
Unoccupied Dehumidify
Typical scenarios: This scenario works best and is used most in hot and humid climates (e.g.,
Miami, Houston, etc.).
Assumptions
• The VAV objects added as members to the Area are identified as Dehumidifying members (not
limited to VAV objects, but can also include binary output objects.)
• Area operating mode is Unoccupied
• Unoccupied Dehumidification must be enabled in the Area function page.
• The Area space humidity must be above the Enable Dehumidification setpoint.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Unoccupied Dehumidify mode


3. Area compares its space humidity sensor with its Enable Dehumidification
setpoint.
a. When the Area space humidity is above its Enable Dehumidification
Setpoint (typically 60%), the Area operating mode transitions to
Unoccupied Dehumidify.
b. When the Area space humidity is below its Disable Dehumidification
Setpoint (typically 55%), the Area operating mode transitions back to
Unoccupied.
4. When the Area operating mode transitions to Unoccupied Dehumidify, it
controls the operating mode of all dehumidify VAV members to
Unoccupied Dehumidify at the Area priority level.
5. Ventilation and non-dehumidifying members are Unoccupied or disabled.
Space Temperature Setpoint BAS sent to the unit by the Tracer SC.
If the space temperature is above the setpoint, the Tracer SC sends
PreCool. If the space temperature is below the setpoint, the Tracer
SC sends Morning Warm-up.

Troubleshooting

Step 6).
setpoint.
9. The VAV box heating or cooling minimum airflow is based on the heat or
cool control action of the VAV box.
changeover setpoint minus 10°F (5.6°C).
• controls the common space VAV members operating mode to
Unoccupied Dehumidify at the VAS priority level.
Unoccupied Dehumidify at the VAS priority level (there is a time delay(a)
in VAS to allow time for the common space VAV boxes to open).
temperature to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint (located on the
Configuration page of the VAS). If the space temperature is above the
setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the space temperature is below the
setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-up.

Troubleshooting

AHU object 13. The operating mode controls the following values to the AHU at the VAS
priority level:
temperature to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint. If the space temperature
is above the setpoint, the SC sends PreCool. If the space temperature is
below the setpoint, the SC sends Morning Warm-up (based on Step 11).
13).

Troubleshooting
Timed Override
Assumptions
• The VAV boxes, with Timed Override capability, added as members of the Area and the override
check box is selected. This can be done using the Area creation wizard, or from the Member
Configuration screen (shown below).
• Timed override is enabled on the Area Configuration page (Operations section) and its duration
is defined.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Timed Override mode.

Scheduling 1. The HVAC schedule controls the Area to Unoccupied.
VAV Box 2. The On button on the zone sensor is pushed and held (for 5 seconds) by
the tenant to initiate a timed override for the space.

Troubleshooting

Area 3. The Area monitors all of the members, designated as override, for a Timed
Override request from a zone sensor. When an override is detected the
following happens:
• The Area operating mode changes to Occupied
• The Area Occupancy Request is overridden to Bypass (at the Area
priority level)
• Area controls the operating mode of all of its members to Occupied
priority level:
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Release (at the Area priority level)
• Heat Cool Mode Request = Release (at the Area priority level)
Note: The VAV box Heat/Cool mode is determined by the priority array,
where the highest level mode (lowest number) is applied when
control is released.
Occupied at the VAS priority level
Occupied at the VAS priority level (there is a time delay(a) in VAS to allow
time for the common space VAV boxes to open)
p. 245
AHU object 7. The AHU receives the following values from the VAV AHU object (at the
VAS priority level):
AHU 8. The AHU receives the following values from the AHU object (at the VAS
priority level):

Troubleshooting
Communications Loss
Typical scenarios:
• The SC is powered down for service (code update) and loses communications to the AHU,
VAVs, and Unit Controllers.
Assumptions
This sequence of operation assumes the following:
• The send/receive heartbeat settings are not altered.
• There is no space temperature sensor on the AHU
• There are discharge air sensors on the VAV boxes.
The following steps occur in the order shown during Communication Loss mode.

All Controllers 1. Each unit controller uses its last communicated value from the Tracer SC
for 15 minutes (the receive heartbeat timer setting).
After 15 minutes
VAV Box 2. VAV boxes with LonTalk controllers revert to their local inputs and
setpoints.
3. For VAV boxes with BACnet controllers, their occupancy reverts to
Occupied and all communicated sensor values enter a fault state and the
controller reverts to local sensor values. All setpoints within the controller
remain in their last communicated state.
Note: If there is no hardwired zone sensor or no locally bound zone sensor
available, the VAV box generates a space temperature fail
diagnostic and puts the air valve at the cooling minimum airflow
setting. All heat will be off. A series fan will be on. A parallel fan will
be off.
AHU 4. AHUs with LonTalk controllers revert to their local inputs and setpoints.
5. For AHUs with BACnet controllers, their occupancy reverts to Occupied
and all communicated sensor values enter a fault state and the controller
reverts to local sensor values. All setpoints within the controller remain in
their last communicated state.

Troubleshooting
Isolating Problem VAV Boxes

One bad apple can sometimes spoil the whole bunch. This analogy is applicable to VAS too.
Fortunately, VAS has an advanced feature that allows for manually preventing a problem VAV box
from contributing to the collective. Select the Members tab in the Tracer SC VAS editor (refer to
Figure 148). To remove the problem VAV box from the VAS, perform the following steps:
1. From the Tracer SC select Systems in the left-hand navigation and then select the appropriate
VAS from the Variable Air Systems list.
2. Click Members.
3. Select the check box for any VAV box in the member list.
4. Click actions... > edit configuration. All the VAV boxes will display in the configuration
window.
5. Locate the VAV box in the VAV Members list and uncheck the check box beneath the category
where the VAV box is not functioning properly (calculations, duct opt, vent opt, and common
space).
6. Click Save.
7. Fix the VAV box.
8. When the VAV box is fixed, return to the VAS member configuration page and re-enable what
was just disabled.
Figure 148. Getting Rid of problem VAV boxes
Possible Duct Pressure Optimization Problems

For duct pressure optimization, the VAV box with the “most-open” air valve determines which way
the requested duct pressure setpoint moves. If one VAV box is always starved for air (the bad
apple), its air damper will typically be open to 100% at all times. Duct pressure optimization will
increase its requested duct static pressure setpoint until it bumps up against the duct static
pressure setpoint high limit. This is not a desirable behavior.
VAS will report which VAV box has the most-open air valve, but VAS does not know if this VAV box
has a problem. The technician must determine that by more intuitive means. VAS can only keep
track of one most-open VAV box at a time even if there are two VAV boxes with valves open to the
same percentage. There will always be a most-open air damper in the VAS so removing the
problem VAV box will only make another one show up (although this time it may not be a bad one).

Troubleshooting
Possible Ventilation Optimization Problems

For the ventilation optimization feature in VAS, the VAV box with the highest ventilation ratio
determines which way the requested outdoor airflow setpoint moves. Using the same example as
discussed previously (a VAV box that is always starved for air), the VAV box ventilation ratio is likely
to be 1.0 (or whatever value the VAS point “Ventilation Optimization Maximum Percentage of
Outdoor Air” is restricting the ventilation ratio to be). Consequently, ventilation optimization is
going to over-ventilate the building. The indoor air quality will benefit from excessive ventilation,
but the costs associated with conditioning that outdoor air will rise dramatically. (The AHU is going
to have to work harder to heat or cool the extra outdoor air to 55 degrees).
Just as with duct pressure optimization, VAS reports which VAV box has the highest ventilation
ratio, but it does not know if this VAV box has a problem; it keeps track of one highest ventilation
ratio at a time; and as problem VAV boxes are removed, VAS continues to report the next VAV box
with the highest ventilation ratio, which may or may not have a problem.
Possible Space Temperature Summary Problems

For the space temperature summary feature in VAS, each VAV space temperature contributes its
value to the minimum, average, and maximum temperature calculations. One substantially high
or low value is not likely to alter the average space temperature in the VAS (had it not been
substantially high or low) but it is going to prevent finding out where the next warmest or coldest
zone in your building is.
Again, VAS reports which box has the warmest and coldest space temperature, but it does not give
a reason; it is up to the technician to determine why by some other means. There will always be
a maximum and minimum space temperature in the VAS so simply getting rid of one or the other
will only make another show up in its place.

Appendix A: Controller Flow Settings Worksheet
Use the worksheet shown in Table 18, p. 240 to record the settings the installing technician should
use to configure the controller.
Figure 149.Determining flow settings
Best Practices for Determining the VV550/551 and UC400 Flow Settings
The numbers below correlate to the numbers shown in Figure 149. They provide general
guidelines for determining the values to use on the worksheet. The VV550/551 name is first and the
UC400 name is second.
1. Nominal Flow/Air Flow Nominal Status: This value is based on the size of the box. If using
Trane VAV boxes, select VariTrane™ F in Rover and the recommended nominal flow for the size
of the box should show up. For non-Trane boxes, measure the size of the box and select a
VariTrane F box of similar size to get the nominal flow value.
2. Minimum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Minimum: This value can be set to zero, or to greater
than 10% of the value used for nominal flow. It should be available from the job specs created
by the Consulting Engineer.
3. Maximum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Maximum: This value should be available from the
job specs created by the Consulting Engineer.
4. Standby Minimum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Standby: If this value is not
specified on the job specs, use the same value as the minimum airflow.
5. Heating Standby Minimum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Maximum Standby Heat: If this
value is not specified on the job specs, use the same value as the minimum airflow.
6. Heating Minimum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Heat: If this value is not specified
on the job specs, use the same value as the minimum airflow.
7. Heating Maximum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Maximum Heat: If this value is not
specified on the job specs, use the same value as the maximum airflow.
8. Local Heat Minimum Airflow/Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Local Heat: This value is
usually larger than the minimum airflow setting and is dependent on the reheat configuration
of the VAV box. Refer to the documentation supplied with the box to determine the minimum
airflow for the reheat option installed.

9. Occupied Ventilation Setpoint/Ventilation Setpoint Active: This is a calculated value
based on the ASHRAE standard. Refer to “Ventilation Optimization,” p. 159 for more
information on how this value is calculated. If Ventilation Optimization is not used, set this value
to zero.
10. Occupied Standby Ventilation Setpoint/Ventilation Standby Setpoint: This is a
calculated value based on the ASHRAE standard. Refer to “Ventilation Optimization,” p. 159 for
more information on how this value is calculated. If Ventilation Optimization is not used, set this
value to zero.
Table 18. Controller flow settings worksheet (bold indicates UC400 values)
Air Flow Setpoint Maximum Standby Heat
Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Local Heat
Occupied Standby Ventilation Setpoint**

Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Standby
Air Flow Setpoint Maximum Heat

Air Flow Setpoint Minimum Heat
Heating Standby Minimum Airflow
Occupied Ventilation Setpoint**
Ventilation Standby Setpoint

Air Flow Setpoint Maximum
Air Flow Setpoint Minimum
Ventilation Setpoint Active

Local Heat Minimum Airflow
Air Flow Nominal Status
Heating Maximum Airflow

Standby Minimum Airflow
Location Label
Heating Minimum Airflow

(e.g., VAV 01-01)
Maximum Airflow*
Minimum Airflow*
Nominal Flow
*From Specs
**If using Rover, these values are available in the Ventilation Setup group on the Setup tab.

Appendix B: Tracer SC Mapping to MP580/581 Network Variable Inputs (nvi) and Profile
Appendix B: Tracer SC Mapping to MP580/581 Network

Variable Inputs (nvi) and Profile
Associations
This mapping occurs automatically when the MP580/581 is installed in the Tracer SC.
Tracer SC MP580/581
SC Name SC Point SC Equipment Type LonTalk Network Variable Profile NV
Type Name Index
Occupancy Request Multistate Constant Volume Air Handler nviOccSchedule SCC 304
Output
Heat/Cool Request Multistate Constant Volume Air Handler nviApplicMode SCC 307
Output
Emergency Override Multistate Constant Volume Air Handler nviEmergOverride SCC 310
Output
Occupancy Request Multistate Variable Volume Air Handler nviOccSchedule DAC 315
Output
Heat/Cool Request Multistate Variable Volume Air Handler nviApplicMode DAC 317
Output
Emergency Override Multistate Variable Volume Air Handler nviEmergOverride DAC 318
Output
Occupancy Request Multistate Programmable Controller nviOccSchedule MP580 330
Output

Appendix C: Member Occupancy Response to Area and
VAS Operating Modes
Area
Table 19 details the occupancy request only of Area members for a given operating mode, Area
Heating/Cooling mode, and member type. The operating mode of the Area equipment members
will typically follow the Area operating mode.
Table 19. Area member occupancy in response to Area operating modes.
Area Area Binary Member Type Area Equipment Member Type

H/C
Area Operating Mode Mode Cool Only Heat Only Heat/Cool Ventilation Cool Only Heat Only Heat/Cool Ventilation
Heat Off On(a) On(a) On Occupied Occupied Occupied Occupied
Occupied
Cool On(a) Off On(a) On Occupied Occupied Occupied Occupied
Heat Off Off Off Off Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied
Unoccupied
Cool Off Off Off Off Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heating/ Heat Off On On Off Unoccupied Occupied Occupied Unoccupied

Cooling Cool On Off On Off Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied
Night Purge On(b) Off On(b) Off Occupied(b) Unoccupied Occupied(b) Unoccupied
Heat Off On(a) On(a) Off Unoccupied Occupied(c) Occupied(c) Unoccupied
Optimal Start
Cool On(a) Off On(a) Off Occupied(c) Unoccupied Occupied(c) Unoccupied
Heat On On On On Standby(d) Standby(d) Standby(d) Occupied
Optimal Stop
Cool On On On On Standby(d) Standby(d) Standby(d) Occupied
Heat On(e) On(e) On(e) Off Occupied(e) Occupied(e) Occupied(e) Unoccupied
Unoccupied Humidify
Cool On(e) On(e) On(e) Off Occupied(e) Occupied(e) Occupied(f) Unoccupied
Heat Off Off On(f) Off Occupied(f) Unoccupied Occupied(f) Unoccupied
Unoccupied Dehumidify
Cool On(f) On(f) On(f) Off Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Unoccupied
Heat On(f) On(f) On(f) Off Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Unoccupied
Humidity Pull Down
Cool On(f) On(f) On(f) Off Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Occupied(f) Unoccupied
(a) On if occupied temperature control is disabled; otherwise, it follows the occupied temperature control logic.
(b) On/Occupied if Night Purge is enabled; otherwise, it is off.
(c) The unit controller occupancy is Occupied, but the outdoor air damper is closed.
(d) The unit controller shall be placed in standby mode. BACnet controllers shall have the occupied setpoints set to the Area standby setpoint. LonTalk
controllers will use the standby setpoints to widen the heating and cooling setpoints. Equipment will maintain outdoor air requirements.
(e) On or Occupied if the member is a humidify member of Area; otherwise, the member will be Off or Unoccupied.
(f) On or Occupied if the member is a dehumidify member or Area; otherwise, the member will be Off or Unoccupied.

Appendix C: Member Occupancy Response to Area and VAS Operating Modes
VAS
Table 20 details the occupancy request only of VAS members for a given operating mode. The
operating mode of the air handler and common space VAV boxes will always follow the operating
mode of the VAS.
Table 20. VAS member occupancy in response to VAS operating modes.
VAS Binary
VAS Equipment Members Members
Common Space
VAS Operating Mode Air Handler VAV Boxes Ventilation Ventilation
Occupied Occupied Occupied Occupied On
Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied Unoccupied Off
Unoccupied Heating/
Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
Cooling
Night Purge Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
Optimal Start Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
Optimal Stop Occupied(a) Standby Occupied On
Unoccupied Humidify Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
Unoccupied Dehumidify Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
Humidity Pull Down Occupied Occupied Unoccupied Off
(a) VAV air handlers do not support the Standby mode for Occupancy.

Appendix D: Area and VAS Rank Arbitration for
Operating Mode
Table 21 describes how Area and VAS determines which operating mode it should be in.
Area uses this table to determine the operating mode when several Area functions are active
simultaneously
Example: When the Area is Unoccupied, the Unoccupied Heating/Cooling function is active,
and Unoccupied Dehumidify function is also active. The resultant operating mode is
Unoccupied Heating/Cooling because it has a higher ranking in the table than Unoccuppied
Dehumidify). This operating mode is then sent to the Area member VAV boxes.
VAS uses this table to determine operating mode when it is supporting more than one Area. VAS
monitors the operating mode sent its member VAV boxes, the VAS responds to VAV boxes
operating modes using the ranking listed in Table 21 to determine the VAS operating mode.
Example: Area 1 has an operating mode of Unoccupied Heating/Cooling, while Area 2 has an
operating mode of Optimal Start. The VAV boxes in both Areas are also members of the VAS.
VAS sees both operating modes and uses Table 21 to arbitrate. VAS determines its operating
mode should be Optimal Start because Optimal Start is ranked higher than Unoccupied
Heating/Cooling. The VAS operating mode is then passed to the air handler and common space
VAV boxes.
Table 21. Area and VAS arbitration rank for operating modes.
Rank Operating Mode How Area Determines Operating Mode
1 Occupied All equipment will be occupied if the conditions for optimal stop are not true.
The Area can only enter the Optimal Stop mode under the following conditions:
• The Area is Occupied
2 Optimal Stop • The optimal window is active
• The Area determines there is sufficient capacity in the building to maintain
the space temperature within two degrees of the Occupied setpoints.
The area can only enter optimal start if the area is unoccupied, the optimal
3 Optimal Start
window is active and the optimal start early limit has been reached.
The area can only enter humidity pull down if the area is unoccupied, the
4 Humidity Pull Down optimal window is active and the humidity pull down early limit has been
reached. (only members checked as dehumidification members will respond)
The area can only enter night heat cool if the are is unoccupied, night heat cool
5 Unoccupied Heating/Cooling is enabled and the space temperature is above the unoccupied cooling setpoint
or below the unoccupied heating setpoint.
Night Dehumidify can occur if the dehumidify function is enabled, the area
6 Unoccupied Dehumidify space humidify rises above the unoccupied humidity setpoint. (only members
checked as dehumidification members will respond)
Night Humidity can occur if the humidify function is enabled, the area space
7 Unoccupied Humidify humidity falls below the unoccupied humidity setpoint. (only members checked
as humidification members will respond)
Night Purge can occur if:
• The Area must be unoccupied
• The Night Purge function must be enabled.
• The Night Purge/Economizing decision must be true.
8 Night Purge
• The space/outdoor air temperature differential must be satisfied.
• The space temperature must be at least one degree above the occupied
cooling setpoint.
• Only members checked as night purge members will respond.
9 Unoccupied All equipment will be unoccupied if none of the modes defined above are true.

Appendix E: Equipment Response to Operating Modes
Appendix E: Equipment Response to Operating Modes

Table 22 shows how equipment is controlled by Area and VAS for a given operating mode. Each
application will control the five points at the assigned priority levels for that application (refer to
Table 23, p. 246)
Table 22. Equipment response to operating modes
Property All Equipment except VAV AHUs VAV AHU

Heat Cool Min OA Heat Cool Min OA
Operating Occupancy OA cfm Economizer Occupancy OA cfm Economizer
Mode Damper Mode Damper
Mode Request Stpt Enable Request Stpt Enable
Request Stpt Request Stpt
Occupied Occupied Release Release Release Release Occupied Release Release Release Release
Unoccupied Unoccupied Release 0 0 Disable Unoccupied Off(a) 0 0 Disable
Morning Morning
Unoccupied Heat/Cool Occupied Warm-up(b) 0 0 Release Occupied Warm-up(c) 0 0 Release
Precool(b) Precool(c)
Night Purge Occupied Night purge Release Release Active Occupied Night Purge Release Release Active
Morning Morning
Optimal Start Occupied Warm-up(b) 0 0 Release Occupied Warm-up(c) 0 0 Release
Optimal Stop Standby Release Release Release Release Occupied(d) Release Release Release Release
Morning Morning
Unoccupied Humidify Occupied Warm-up(b) 0 0 Release Occupied Warm-up(c) 0 0 Release
Morning Morning
Unoccupied Dehumidify Occupied Warm-up(b) 0 0 Release Occupied Warm-up(c) 0 0 Release
Morning Morning
Humidity Pull down Occupied Warm-up(b) 0 0 Release Occupied Warm-up(c) 0 0 Release
(a) Heat Cool Mode Request is controlled to Off on VAV air handlers to prevent Unoccupied Heating/Cooling operations.
(b)Heat Cool Mode Request calculations are calculated using properties from the equipment:
• Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the Space Temperature Active is below the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS or
if either value is invalid.
• Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the Space Temperature Active is above or equal to the Space Temperature Setpoint BAS
(c) Heat Cool Mode Request Calculations are calculated by the VAS based on the following:
• Heating Cooling Mode Request is Morning Warm-up if the VAS Average Space Temperature is below the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint or
if either value is invalid.
• Heating Cooling Mode Request is PreCool if the VAS Average Space Temperature is above or equal to the VAV AHU Startup Setpoint
(d) Occupancy Request is controlled to Occupied as VAV air handlers do not support the Standby mode.

Appendix F: Tracer SC Priority Levels and Assigned
Applications
Table 23 shows the Tracer SC default priority levels along with the applications assigned to those
priority levels. Applications will perform all control at the application’s assigned priority level. The
priority level names are editable (with the exception of Life Safety - Manual, Life Safety - Auto,
Critical Equipment, Minimum On/Off, and Manual Override High).
Table 23. Tracer SC default priority levels and assigned applications
Control Class Priority Level Name Assigned Applications
1 Life Safety-Manual Emergency Override for Users
2 Life Safety-Auto Emergency Override for System Applications
3 Miscellaneous ---
4 Miscellaneous ---
5 Critical Equipment Factory Safety TGP2
6 Minimum On/Off Minimum On/Off
7 Miscellaneous ---
8 Manual Override High User High
9 Programming High TGP2 High
10 Application High VAS
11 Manual Override Medium User Medium
12 Application Medium Area (TOV)
13 Manual Override Low User Low
14 Programming Low Programming Low
15 Application Low Scheduling
16 Miscellaneous ---

Appendix G: Trane Equipment Response to Optimal Start Heating
Appendix G: Trane Equipment Response to Optimal

Start Heating
Table 24 describes how Trane VAV air handlers respond to an Optimal Start heating request based
on the unit type.
Note: Some units enter a constant volume mode when placed in an Optimal Start heating mode.
Table 24. Trane equipment response to Optimal Start Heating.
Equipment/Controller type Equipment Response
• Constant volume heat

Staged heat • Reports Max Heat
• No ventilation
RTU
IntelliPak (LCI-I) • Constant volume heat
determines whether it
Modulating heat • Reports Max Heat
should do Morning
Warm-up • No ventilation
• VAV heat
CSC Any heat • Reports Morning Warm-up
• No ventilation
• Constant volume heat

Voyager Commercial (LCI-R) • Reports Max Heat
• No ventilation
• VAV heat
AH540/541 Hydronic heat • Reports Morning Warm-up
• No ventilation
• VAV heat
AH540/541 Electric heat • Reports Morning Warm-up
• No ventilation
Completely programmable – will run as

MP580/581
programmed
Note: Not all IntelliPak I air handlers report Max Heat during Optimal Start heating mode. To
ensure that the VAV box air valves are driven to max cfm setpoint, an additional TGP2
program is necessary. Refer to Figure 150, p. 248.

Figure 150.Excerpt from VAV_Constant_Volume_Drive_max TGP2 program

Appendix H: Common Tracer SC Enumerations

Table 25 lists the common enumerations within Tracer SC. These enumerations are used for both
equipment and applications. False and True values are used for binary points, and numeric values
show the text and corresponding value used in multi-state point definitions.
Table 25. Tracer SC Enumerations
Key/Point names Enumerations
Air Flow Min Setpoint Source 1 = None (no minimum enforced)

2 = Cooling Minimum
3 = Heating Minimum
4 = Local Heating Minimum
5 = Standby Cooling Minimum
6 = Standby Heating Minimum
7 = Derived from Ventilation Requirements
8 = Pressure Dependent Mode Min
Air Flow Override 1 = Air Valves Auto Control

2 = Not Used
3 = Not Used
4 = Not Used
5 = Air Valves Full Open
6 = Air Valves Full Closed
7 = Air Valves Minimum Setpoint
8 = Air Valves Maximum Setpoint
Air Valve Position Control Status false (0) = pressure independent control
true (1) = position control/pressure dependent
Auto Commission Start Request false (0)= Cancel

true (1) = Start
Auto Comm State 1 = Waiting

2 = Calibrating
3 = Flow Test
4 = Fan Test
5 = Reheat Test
6 = Finished
7 = Canceled
Base Loading Active false (0)= Inactive

true (1) = Active
Baseboard Heat Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Binary Input Status X false (0)= Off

Note: X = 01 through 04 true (1) = On
Binary Output Override X false (0)= Off

Binary Output Request X false (0)= Off

Binary Output Status X false (0)= Off

Communication Status 1 = Not Communicating

2 = No Logical Device Connected
3 = Communicating
4 = Startup

Table 25. Tracer SC Enumerations (continued)
Condensate Overflow Alarm false (0)= Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
Condenser Type 1 = None

2 = Air Cooled Condenser
3 = Water Cooled Condenser
4 = Evaporative Condenser
Condenser Water Flow BAS 1 = Flow

2 = No Flow
3 = Auto
Condenser Water Flow Status false (0)= No Flow

true (1) = Flow
Condenser Water Pump Request false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Condenser Water Pump Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Cooling Fan Default Cycling false (0)= Cycling

true (1) = Continuous
Cooling Fan Default Status 1 = No Default

2 = Off
3 = Low
4 = Undefined
5 = Medium
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = Not Used
9 = High
10 = Not Used
11 = Not Used
12 = Not Used
13 = Not Used
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Not Used
17 = Auto
Cool Stage X Status 1 = Off

Note: X = 1–8 2 = On
3 = Not Present
Defrost Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Dehumidification Control Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Dehumid System Enable BAS false (0)= Disable

true (1) = Auto
Dirty Filter Alarm false (0)= Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
ECM Fan Output Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On

Economizer Enable Type 1 = Absolute Temperature

2 = Relative Temperature
3 = Absolute Enthalpy
4 = Comparative Enthalpy
Economizer Enable BAS 1 = Disabled

2 = Enabled
3 = Auto
Economizer Enable Water BAS 1 = Disabled

2 = Enabled
3 = Auto
Economizer Status 1 = At or Below Minimum Position

2 = Above Minimum Position
3 = Not Present
Economizer System Status 1 = Disabled

2 = Enabled
3 = Not Present
Economizer Type 1 = None

2 = 2 Position Ventilation
3 = Modulation Economizer
4 = 2 Position Ventilation/Waterside Economizer
5 = Waterside Economizer
6 = Airside/Waterside Economizer
7 = TRAQ Damper
8 = Airside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
9 = Waterside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
10 = Airside/Waterside Economizer and TRAQ Damper/Sensor
Emergency Override BAS 1 = Normal

2 = Pressurize
3 = Depressurize
4 = Purge
5 = Shutdown
6 = Fire
EngyWheelPreheatStatus 1 = Inactive
2 = Active
Engy Wheel Frost Avoid Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Engy Wheel Status 1 = Inactive

2 = Active
1 = Disabled
2 = Differential
Enthalpy Mode 3 = Fixed
4 = Differential Dry Bulb
5 = Fixed Dry Bulb
Evaporator Water Flow Status false (0)= No Flow

true (1) = Flow
Evaporator Water Pump Request false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Exhaust Fan Failure false (0)= Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
Exhaust Fan Failure Reset false (0)= Normal

true (1) = Reset

Exhaust Fan On Off Control 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Fan Output Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Fan Speed Cooling 1 = Off

2 = Low
3 = Medium
4 = High
5 = Auto
Fan Speed Heating 1 = Off

2 = Low
3 = Medium
4 = High
5 = Auto
FinalFilterStatus 1 = Clean
2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present
Filter Timer Reset Request false (0)= Normal

true (1) = Reset
Generic BI1 Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Generic Binary Input Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Generic BO1 Request false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Generic BO1 Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Generic Loop Enable BAS false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Generic Relay Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Generic Stage 1 Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On
Generic Stage 2 Status false (0)= Off

true (1) = On

Heat Cool Mode Request 1 = Auto

2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economy Mode
15 = Dehumidifying
16 = Calibrate
Heat Cool Mode Status 1 = Auto

2 = Heat
3 = Morning Warm-up
4 = Cool
5 = Night Purge
6 = Pre Cool
7 = Off
8 = Test
9 = Emergency Heat
10 = Fan Only
11 = Free Cool
12 = Ice-Making
13 = Max Heat
14 = Economy Mode
15 = Dehumidifying
16 = Calibrate
Heat Output x Status false (0)= Off

Note: X = 1–3 true (1) = On
Heat Stage X Status 1 = Off

Note: X = 1–8 2 = On
3 = Not Present
Heating Fan Default Cycling false (0)= Cycling

Heating Fan Default Status 1 = No Default

2 = Off
3 = Low
4 = Undefined
5 = Medium
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = Not Used
9 = High
10 = Not Used
11 = Not Used
12 = Not Used
13 = Not Used
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Not Used
17 = Auto
High Static Alarm false (0)= Normal

true (1) = In Alarm

Hot Gas Bypass Active false (0)= Inactive

true (1) = Active
Humidification Enable BAS false (0)= Disable

true (1) = Auto
IsoVlvStatus1 1 = Closed
2 = Open
3 = Not Present
IsoVlvStatus2 1 = Closed
2 = Open
3 = Not Present
Local Economizer Status 1 = Disabled

2 = Enabled
3 = Not Present
Local or Remote Control Command false (0) = Stand Alone Control

true (1) = BAS Control
Low Temperature Alarm false (0) = Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
Maintenance Ping 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Number of Fan Speeds 1 = Zero

2 = One
3 = Two
4 = Three
5 = Variable Speed
Occupancy Input false (0) = Occupied

true (1) = Unoccupied
Occupancy Request 1 = Occupied

2 = Unoccupied
3 = Occupied Bypass
4 = Occupied Standby
Occupancy Status 1 = Occupied

2 = Unoccupied
3 = Occupied Bypass
4 = Occupied Standby
Occupant Call 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Operating Mode Status 1 = Occupied

2 = Unoccupied
3 = Optimal Start
4 = Humidity Pulldown
5 = Optimal Stop
6 = Unoccupied Heating/Cooling
7 = Night Purge
8 = Unoccupied Humidify
9 = Unoccupied Dehumidify
10 = Unknown Mode
PreFilter Status 1 = Clean

2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present

Primary Filter Status 1 = Clean

2 = Dirty
3 = Not Present
Primary Heat Reheat Enable Cmd false (0) = Enable

true (1) = Disable
Remote Fan Command false (0) = Cycling

Remote Minimum Position Enabled Cmd false (0) = Enable

true (1) = Disable
Reset Diagnostic Request false (0) = Normal

true (1) = Reset
Return Fan Failure false (0) = Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
Return Fan Failure Reset false (0) = Normal

true (1) = Reset
Return Fan On Off Control 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Return Fan Proving Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Reversing Valve Status 1 = Heating

2 = Cooling
3 = Not Present
Space Temp Local Spt Enable false (0) = Disable

true (1) = Enable
Supply Fan Failure false (0) = Normal

true (1) = In Alarm
Supply Fan Failure Reset false (0) = Normal

true (1) = Reset
Supply Fan On Off Control 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Supply Fan Switch Control Local false (0) = Disable

true (1) = Enable
Supply Fan Proving Status 1 = Off

2 = On
3 = Not Present
Timed Override Status 1 = Idle

2 = On
3 = Cancel
UCM Diagnostic Present false (0) = Normal

true (1) = In Alarm

Unit Type Trane 1 = 1 Heat/1 Cool

2 = Heat Pump
3 = Blower Coil
4 = Unit Ventilator
5 = Fan Coil
6 = Rooftop
7 = Air Handler
8 = Vertical Self Contained
9 = Unitary
10 = VAV Box
11 = Fan Coil
Water Valve Control Request 1 = Off

2 = Not Valid
3 = Not Valid
4 = Not Valid
5 = Open
6 = Close

Glossary
Purpose
This glossary defines acronyms, abbreviations, and technical terms used in this document.
Abbreviations and acronyms

AHU air-handling unit
AIP analog input point
AOP analog output point
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-conditioning Engineers
AWG American wire gauge
BACnet building automation and control network
BAS building automation system
BIP binary input point
BOP binary output point
cfm cubic feet/minute
CPL custom programming language
CPU central processing unit
CSC commercial self-contained unit
DAC Discharge Air Controller profile
DAT discharge-air temperature
DDC direct digital control
EA exhaust air
EAT exhaust-air temperature
HVAC heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning
I/O input/output
IAQ indoor air quality
ICS Integrated Comfort system
IP Internet Protocol
IPAK IntelliPak rooftop unit
LAN local area network
LCI LonTalk communication interface
LED light emitting diode
L/s Liters per second
MA mixed air
MAT mixed-air temperature
MWU morning warm-up
nvi network variable input
nvo network variable output
OA outdoor air
OAT outdoor-air temperature
OSS Optimal Start/Stop
Glossary
PDF Portable Document Format file extension (*.pdf)

PID proportional, integral, derivative
PSI pounds per square inch
RA return air
RAT return-air temperature
RCF Rover configuration file extension (*.rcf)
RTU rooftop unit
SA supply air
SAT supply-air temperature
SCC Space Comfort Controller profile
SNVT standard network variable type
STD standard file format extension (*.std)
TGP Tracer graphical programming
TOD time-of-day scheduling
TOV Timed Override
UI user interface
UTP unshielded twisted pair
Vac volts-alternating current
Vdc volts-direct current
VAS VAV air system
VAV variable-air-volume
VFC ventilation flow control
VFD variable frequency drive
VSD variable speed drive
Technical terms
Acronyms are listed according to the most common way to refer to them. In some cases, the
acronyms are the main entry, and in other cases, the full phrase is the main entry.
A
active mode. See Rover operating modes.
AH540/541 air-handler controller. See Tracer AH540/541 air-handler controller.
AIP. See analog input point.
air and water balance. A task usually performed by contractors to measure, calibrate, and
modulate the air and water flow through the system. Trane uses the Air and Water Balancing tool,
which is part of the Rover suite of software tools.
air valve. Sometimes also referred to as an air damper.
alarm. An audible or visual signal from a building automation system or controller that warns of
an abnormal, critical operating condition.
analog. Pertaining to a device or signal that constantly varies in strength or quantity. For example,
temperature, humidity, and flow rate have analog values.

Glossary
analog input. A varying voltage, current, or resistive signal that can be converted to units of
temperature, pressure, humidity, and so on.
analog input point (AIP). 1. A location on a controller where the wiring for an analog input is
terminated.
analog output. A varying voltage or current signal used to change the position of an external
device, such as a valve damper, or temperature setpoint.
analog output point (AOP). 1. A location on a controller where the wiring for an analog output
is terminated.
AOP. See analog output point.
ASHRAE. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
An international organization that advances the science of heating, ventilation, air-conditioning,
and refrigeration (HVAC). It conducts research, writes standards, and promotes continuing
education in the HVAC industry.
auto-commissioning. The Tracer VV550/551 controller includes a special operating sequence
designed to validate the proper operation of all outputs and the ability to measure all inputs. The
purpose of this auto-commissioning sequence is to minimize the labor required to commission the
unit in the field.
B
BACnet Protocol. BACnet is a Data Communications Protocol for Building Automation and
Control Networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol.
BACnet attempts to encompass the full range of control devices by modeling them as objects, each
of which may have an assortment of properties. For example, a temperature sensor may be
considered an object of type Analog Input. Such an object will have many properties, such as
Present Value, Units, Resolution, and Status.
BAS. Building automation system. A combination of controllers and software products that
communicate with and control mechanical systems to manage buildings. The managed systems
can include HVAC systems, lighting systems, access control, and other systems. Also called
building management system (BMS).
binary. 1. A number system with only two digits, 0 and 1, in which each symbol represents a
decimal power of two. 2. Any system that has only two possible states or levels, such as a switch
that is either on or off. (On is 1 and off is 0.) 3. Represented in a computer circuit by the presence
of voltage (1) or absence of voltage (0).
binary input. A two-position signal indicating on/off status. Examples include flow switches,
limit switches, and other contacts.
binary input point (BIP). 1. A location on a controller where the wiring for a binary input is
terminated.
binary output. An on/off control from a microprocessor. Examples include controls to fans,
pumps, dampers, and other controlled outputs.
binary output point (BOP). 1. A location on a controller where the wiring for a binary output is
terminated.
binding. On LonTalk communication links, bindings allow two or more devices to share common
information, such as the same setpoint or zone temperature sensor. Bindings link a network
variable in one device with a network variable in another device. See also network variable.
BIP. See binary input point.

Glossary
BOP. See binary output point.

building automation system (BAS). See BAS.
C
calibration. The process of standardizing a measuring instrument by determining the deviation
from a known value to find the proper correction factor. The Rover service tool can be used to
calibrate the space temperature and hard-wired setpoint from a zone sensor.
Climate Changer air handler. Trane’s brand of air handling units. Climate Changer air handlers
control the airflow and air temperature for an applied air handling system. Trane’s Modular Climate
Changer allows every air handler to be custom tailored to the specific requirements of a job.
Modular Climate Changers are currently available in sizes ranging from 3,000 to 100,000 cfm.
comm link. See communications link.
commissioning. The process of starting up and verifying correct operation of a building
automation system or device.
common space VAV. Common space VAVs are unique to the Tracer SC VAS. They are VAV boxes
that are not assigned to a specific Area and are controlled by the VAS application. They allow the
air handler to supply air to individual spaces without having to provide supply air to all spaces.
Common space VAVs do this by creating an outlet for excess airflow when the air handler is
operating at minimum flow settings, which would still provide too much airflow for the space
making the request.
communications link. The connection between devices that allows data transfer. Trane
communications links typically use twisted-pair wire.
constant-volume system. An air distribution system that supplies a constant volume of air
while varying temperature to maintain comfort.
control loop. The process that manages HVAC equipment. Control loops measure data using
sensors, and process the data at a controller to determine a control response, which results in an
action at the controlled equipment. See also DDC, PID loop.
controller. A microelectronic device that manages the operation of HVAC equipment. Controllers
that manage only one piece of equipment are called unit controllers or unit control modules
(UCMs). See also Tracer controllers.
D
DAC profile. Discharge Air Controller profile. A LonMark® functional profile for HVAC controllers
that provide variable airflow, such as air handlers and VAV rooftop units. The controlled element
is the discharge-air temperature rather than the space temperature. Compare SCC profile.
daisy-chain configuration. A wiring configuration used for LonTalk communications. All
devices are wired as shown below. Refer to “Installation,” p. 26 for more information on LonTalk
communication wiring.
SC
UC UC UC

Glossary
Daytime Warm-up. Daytime Warm-up occurs during occupied periods. When the air handler’s
space temperature is colder than its “Daytime Warm-up Setpoint”, the air handler supplies hot air
to the system.
DDC. Direct digital control. A microprocessor-based control methodology that relies on software
to perform control logic. DDC is more flexible, easier to integrate with other systems, and more
effective than other control methodologies, such as pneumatic control. At Trane, DDC is often used
as synonym for PID control. Compare PID control.
DDC/VAV. A variable-air-volume (VAV) system that uses a controller on each VAV box to provide
temperature control and to interface with a building automation system.
demand controlled ventilation. A method of maintaining indoor air quality through intelligent
ventilation based on occupancy. The quantity of ventilation is controlled based on indoor CO2
levels, which correlate to occupancy levels. Demand controlled ventilation saves money by
reducing ventilation during periods of low occupancy.
depressurize. A control request sent to UCMs during smoke control. Used to coordinate supply
air and exhaust air to create a negative pressure in a space.
direct digital control (DDC). See DDC.
Discharge Air Controller (DAC) profile. See DAC profile.
E
economizer control. Opening an outdoor-air damper to cool a building with outdoor air, usually
when the outdoor air temperature is 40°F to 65°F (5°C to 18°C).
exhaust fan. A fan that removes excess air from a building to prevent over-pressurization and to
discharge unwanted air.
F
factory commissioning. The process of connecting and testing controllers in a factory.
Controllers are connected to the equipment and operated to verify their operating functionality in
detail. This reduces installation costs and helps ensure efficient, quiet, and accurate operation from
the first day through the life of the system. Factory mounting provides additional points not
available in field installations.
flow tracking. Flow tracking is a special application for controlling pressurization in a space. Flow
tracking uses two VAV boxes, one at the supply air inlet and one at the exhaust air outlet, set to
different cfm flow settings in order to maintain either a negative or positive airflow in the space.
G
graphical programming. A method of programming based on the assembly of graphically-
represented logical blocks. See also TGP.
graphical programming block. See TGP block.
H
heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC). See HVAC.
human interface. See user interface.
HVAC. Heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning. Mechanical equipment, such as air handlers and
VAV boxes, that provides environmental comfort to building occupants.

Glossary
I
IntelliPak rooftop unit (IPAK). A heating and cooling rooftop unit. The IntelliPak rooftop unit
can be configured to meet the requirements of most unitary system jobs and is currently available
in 20–130 ton sizes.
Internet Protocol (IP). See IP.
IP. Internet Protocol. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the transmission of messages. It has
been adopted by ASHRAE as a means to communicate BACnet over a network. It allows BACnet
to pass through IP devices, such as IP system routers and over the Internet.
IP address. The 32-bit address defined by the Internet Protocol. The IP address is the unique
numerical code that is used by each device on a network. It is usually represented in dotted decimal
notation (for example, 159.112.138.173). Each of the four values can range from 0 through 255.
L
LCD. Liquid crystal display. A display screen used on some Trane products.
LCI. See Tracer LCI.
Level 4 wire. Used to specify a particular performance of communication wire (normally
associated with LonTalk). Trane recommends Level 4 wire for use with LonTalk installations.
liquid crystal display (LCD). See LCD.
LonMark® functional profiles. LonMark® standards that define standard network variable
types (SNVTs), standard configuration parameter types (SCPTs), and default and power-up
behaviors for compliant HVAC controllers. Many of the latest Tracer controllers use LonMark®
profiles, including the Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile and the Discharge Air Controller
(DAC) profile. Compliance with LonMark® profiles is a part of Trane’s commitment to systems
integration. See also DAC profile, SCC profile, SCPT, SNVT.
LonMark® Interoperability Association. An association of organizations and individuals who
are committed to the development, manufacture, and use of interoperable LonWorks products and
networks. Products that conform to LonMark® guidelines can display the LonMark® logo.
LonTalk protocol. An interoperable protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation and named
as a standard by the Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA-709.1). It is packaged on a Neuron chip.
low-voltage. Common term for National Electrical Code Article 725 Class 2 wiring. Generally 24
Vac, 100 Vac, or less.
M
mode. See Rover operating modes.
morning warm-up. This functions the same as Daytime Warm-up, except it occurs during a
transition from Unoccupied to Occupied or Optimal Start.
N
network variable. An input or output data item from a controller. Network variables enable a
controller to exchange data with other devices on the network. Network variables are defined by
standard network variable types (SNVTs). See also SNVT.

Glossary
Neuron ID. A unique identifying number assigned to each LonWorks controller. Neuron IDs
eliminate the need to set addresses with DIP switches.
Night Purge. Exchanging cool, dry outdoor air with warm inside air in preparation for an
Occupied condition.
night setback. Refer to Unoccupied Heating/Cooling.
noise. Electrical interference that creates abnormal characteristics and behaviors on an electrical
signal.
O
Optimal Start. The process of efficiently starting HVAC equipment so that the occupied setpoints
are achieved at the appropriate time. The equipment uses recirculated air to PreCool or pre-heat
a space as quickly as possible before it is Occupied. For example, the Tracer Summit system may
be programmed for Occupied temperature at 6:00 AM. With Optimal Start, the system may start at
5:15 AM to reach the setpoint by 6:00 AM.
Optimal Stop. Optimal stop is a scheduled event, but it is also a temperature-based function of
Area Control. Optimal stop is the process of efficiently stopping the mechanical heating or cooling
in advance of the space going into an Unoccupied mode. Because this is an occupied condition,
the air handler and fan continue to run and the outdoor air damper is set to allow minimum outdoor
air into the air handler.
output. See analog output, binary output.
P
passive mode. See Rover operating modes.
pressurize. A control request sent to UCMs during smoke control. Used to coordinate supply air
and exhaust air to create a positive pressure in a space.
profile. See LonMark® functional profile.
purge. In the HVAC industry, the act of bringing in outdoor air to cool a building. Purging during
Unoccupied hours allows the mechanical cooling equipment to operate less during Occupied
hours.
R
referencer. In Tracer SC software, allows the value of one property to be set equal to the value of
another property.
repeater. An electronic device used to regenerate, at full strength, signals that have weakened.
It is used with digital signals and ignores invalid voltages, such as noise.
resistor. An electronic circuit component which offers resistance to the flow of electric current for
the purpose of operation, protection, or control. The resistance is measured in ohms.
RJ-11 connector. A connector that attaches computers to LANs. It looks like a telephone
connector, but is larger.
rooftop unit (RTU). Roof-mounted packaged cooling and heating unit. Trane offers Voyager,
Precedent, and IntelliPak rooftops units in a range of sizes.
room sensor. See zone sensor.

Glossary
Rover operating modes. The Rover LonTalk service tool can operate in one of three modes. In
the passive mode, Rover cannot manage networks. This is the safest (and default) mode of
operation. In this mode, Rover can configure controllers, but cannot create bindings or perform
flash downloads. On third-party networks, only the passive mode should be used. In the server-
connected mode, Rover can work on networks where another server, such as a SC or Tracker
controller, is on the link. In this mode, Rover can create bindings and perform flash downloads. In
the active mode, Rover can configure controllers on a Trane peer-to-peer network (a network
without a server). In this mode, Rover can create bindings, perform flash downloads, and clean up
communications links.
Rover LonTalk service tool . A software application for monitoring, configuring, and testing
Tracer controllers on LonTalk links. Rover is compatible with the EIA/CEA-860 standard for software
plug-ins for LonTalk devices. See also EIA/CEA-860 standard, plug-in.
S
SCC profile. Space Comfort Controller profile. A LonMark® functional profile for HVAC terminal
devices, such as WSHP, unit vents, blower coils, VAV boxes, and fan coils. SCC controllers control
to a space temperature setpoint. Many Tracer controllers use the SCC profile to support systems
integration. See also functional profile. Compare DAC profile.
schedules . Times assigned for defined actions to occur for components of the building
automation system. These include on/off commands.
sensor. A device used to read or monitor a physical property, such as temperature, pressure, or
humidity, for use by a controller or building automation system. See also zone sensor.
server-connected mode. See Rover operating modes.
service pin. A button on a Tracer controller that allows the installer to locate and identify it on the
network based on its Neuron ID. When pressed, the service pin sends its Neuron ID to Rover. See
also Neuron ID.
setpoint. A desired outcome, such as a room temperature, to be achieved and maintained by an
HVAC system. Setpoints can be communicated from a building automation system or set at a zone
sensor or touch screen.
smoke control. There are several forms of smoke control ranging from a simple shutdown in
response to a fire alarm up to zoned smoke control in a high-rise building. Smoke control is used
to keep smoke out of populated areas of a building and ventilate it to the outdoor.
SNVT. Standard network variable type. A definition of data objects in the LonTalk protocol. SNVTs
are organized into LonMark® functional profiles for specific applications. The acronym is
pronounced snivit.
Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile. See SCC profile.
standard network variable type (SNVT). See SNVT.
start-up temperature . The start-up temperature is used during a transition from Unoccupied to
either Optimal Start or Unoccupied Heating/Cooling. It is used by the AHU when not referencing
the heat/cool input property. The AHU compares the space temperature to the start-up temperature
defined in the DAC editor. If the space temperature is below the start-up temperature, the system
will start heating. If the space temperature is above the start-up temperature, the system will start
cooling.
supply fan. A fan that moves air through an HVAC system to provide hot or cold air to an area.

Glossary
T
terminal unit. HVAC equipment that provides comfort directly to a space. For example, fan coils
and unit ventilators. Air-handlers are not normally terminal units, but the VAV boxes that provide
conditioned air to a space are.
TGP. Tracer graphical programming. A programming language for HVAC applications that are
controlled by Tracer MP580/581 programmable controllers. TGP programs consist of logical blocks
assembled into a picture that describes the sequence of operation.
TGP2 block. A programming unit, such as OR and ON, used to assemble TGP2
programs. Examples include input and output blocks, constant blocks, function
blocks, logic blocks, and variable blocks.
Tracer AH540/541 air-handler controllers. Controllers that support air-
handling product configurations with analog modulating valves, economizer
dampers, and face and bypass dampers. Tracer AH540/541 controllers also support
constant-volume or variable-air volume supply fans. The Tracer AH540 is factory-mounted and the
Tracer AH541 is field-installed.
Tracer graphical programming. See TGP.
Tracer LCI. Tracer LonTalk communication interface. A device that allows a certain type of
controller to communicate using LonTalk. There are four LCIs. The Tracer LCI-V is for Voyager
rooftop controllers. The Tracer LCI-R is for ReliaTel controllers on Precedent rooftop units. The
Tracer LCI-I is for IntelliPak controllers. The Tracer LCI-C is for chiller controllers.
Tracer MP580/581 programmable controller. Programmable LonTalk controllers for a variety
of HVAC applications. The Tracer MP580/581 may be factory-mounted on Trane Modular and T-
Series Climate Changer air handlers. The Tracer MP581 is available for field installation. Tracer
MP580/581 controllers use the Tracer graphical programming (TGP) language. See also TGP.
U
UCM. Unit control module. A Trane term for a microelectronic circuit board that is used to control
HVAC equipment and link to an Integrated Comfort system.
unit control module (UCM). See UCM.
unit controller. A control device residing on a single piece of equipment. Unit controllers can be
attached to a system-level controller, such as a SC. Trane advocates use of the LonTalk protocol at
the unit level. Also called unit control module (UCM).
user interface (UI). A means for a user to interact with a computer. For example, a touch screen
or the part of a software program with which the user interacts.
V
variable air volume (VAV). See VAV.
VariTrane air terminal devices. Trane’s pressure-independent VAV terminal units. The
VariTrane product line is comprised of single-duct (cooling), dual-duct (cooling and heating), or fan-
Glossary
powered (parallel or series) units. Units may have electric or hydronic reheat. The VariTrane
product line offers an optional DDC/VAV UCM for greater control, accuracy, and integration into the
Trane Integrated Comfort system.
VAV. Variable air volume. An air distribution system that varies the volume of air supplied to a
space to maintain acceptable comfort conditions.
VFC box. Dedicated ventilation systems use single-duct VAV boxes for ventilation flow control
(called VFC boxes). These boxes are configured with either electric reheat or no reheat (shutoff
boxes).
Voyager rooftop air conditioner. Trane’s light commercial unitary rooftop air conditioner that
is available in sizes ranging from 3–50 tons of nominal cooling capacity. The Voyager rooftop comes
standard with microelectronic DDC unit controller that makes the unit an integral part of the Trane
Integrated Comfort system.
W
wink. In Rover Comm5 service tool, a procedure that matches a controller shown in the Rover
main window with the actual controller. When the wink command is initiated in Rover, the LED on
the controller winks for approximately 10 seconds.
XYZ
zone. The smallest area of control in an HVAC system. A zone is characterized by having a single
thermostat or zone temperature sensor. A room served by a single VAV box is a zone. Several
rooms served by the same VAV box also constitute a zone.
zone sensor. A device that measures the temperature in a space and
sends it to a controller by means of a variable resistance signal.

Index
Numerics VAS, 214 sensor, 36
24 Vac power VV550/551, 214 duct static pressure optimization,
Auto Changeover Setpoint, 58 156
and LonTalk wiring, 38
auto-commissioning, 14, 36, 141, 148, sensor location, 44
grounding, 38
165, 207, 208 enable DAC profile for MP580/
A interpretation, 151 581, 62
adding VAV boxes to VAS after initial open existing report, 150 for ventilation optimization
setup, 108 results, 149 measure and control outdoor
airflow, 164
AH540/541 sequence, 148
install duct static pressure sensor
controller setup, 50–52 things to consider, 145 at discharge of fan, 153
AHU controllers, 11 using Rover service tool, 145 installing zone sensors, 32
air and water balance, 152 using Tracer Summit, 147 LCI-I controller setup, 54
air handling unit (AHU), 6, 10 verify air valve operation, 151 location labels during
commissioning, 142 verify fan operation, 151 commissioning, 117
configuration, 47 verify reheat operation, 152 min and max Air Flow setpoints,
connections, 44 VV550/551, 145 186
create a DAC object, 98 auxiliary temperature sensor, 13 monitoring CO2 levels, 14
pre-configuration checkout, 48 naming the VAS, 105
airflow
B night econ. and TOV initiator
measurement stations, 12 BACnet, creating objects, 116 check boxes for Area
recalculating total, 174 SC sizing, 16 members, 111
setpoints, 15 best practices, 58, 223, 243 no common space VAVs in
24 Vac power supply, 15 dedicated ventilation, 185
appendix
add VV550/551s as Area heating/ outdoor airflow setpoint, 79
A, Controller flow settings
worksheet, 257 cooling members, 111 power considerations for VV551
AHU startup delay time, 109 retrofit, 16
B, MP580/581 network variable
inputs and profile associations, allow Area to use OA scaling values, 80
260 temperature compensation, scheduled calibration, 121
C, level 4 wire specifications, 261 130 scheduling night economize, 134
applications, special, 181 Area space temperature input for
area space temperature input, 139 Area, 112
assign VAV members, 110 unoccupied heating/cooling supply 50%-60% outdoor air to
setpoints, 124 the critical zone, 171
reference temperature sensors,
112 associating the CO2 sensor with templates for MP580/581
the XIF file, 102 configuration, 63
setup, 109
aux temp sensor for use default for
assign commissioning, 145 Area setup, 113
Areas as schedule members, 114 cold air and hot water for auto- night cool unoccupied
LonTalk devices to Tracer commissioning, 146 differential, 127
Summit objects, 115 commissioning, 141 night heat unoccupied
neuron IDs, 117 configure points before differential, 125
VAVs as area members, 110 modifying TGP, 63 ventilation ratio limit of the AHU,
assumptions, 212, 215, 217, 220, 223, custom graphics, 119 170
226, 229, 231, 233, 235, 237 default ventilation value, 175 Use Rover to enable DAC profile
AHU, 214 determining common space on MP580/581, 99
DAC, 214 VAVs, 87 variable setpoint based on
installation, 31 disable duct static pressure dampers, 10
SCC, 213 optimization for auto- VAS devices in the same SC, 16
scheduling, 212 commissioning, 147 VAV air valve position high and
sequence of operation, 212 discharge air temperature low limits, 156
BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 267

VAV aux heat check box, 108 variables, 63 discharge air
VAV calibration, 121 connections control, 28, 49
VAV naming conventions, 101 air handler, 44 sensor, VAV, 36
ventilation optimization system control temperature, 10
level action, 164 smoke, 5, 191–205 duct configurations, 5
ventilation ratio limit of each VAV controller and equipment pairings, duct pressure setpoint optimization,
setting, 176 11, 48 29
VFC boxes and multiple Areas, controller setup duct static pressure, 10
187 AH540541, 50–52 optimization, 153
BMTX LonTalk wiring terminations, LCI-I, 50–52 best practices, 156
42
LCI-I IntelliPak, 54–55 DAC setup instructions, 154
building automation system (BAS), 8
LCI-R DAC, 53 MP580/581 setup instructions,
building control unit, 8 154
MP580/581, 53, 54, 61
C VFC box, 185 ductwork, 6
calibration, VAV, 121 controllers E
Changeover Setpoint, 58 non-Trane functional capability,
17 effective ventilation setpoint, 164
charts emergency override
DAC present value, 253 cooling and heating setpoints, 112
CPL program request, 191, 195
SCC present value, 250 enable a DAC profile, 62
climate changer, 12 VAV_Alarm.cpl, 201
creating BACnet objects, 116 energy consumption, minimizing,
CO2 levels, 14 171
CO2-based demand controlled critical inputs
equipment and controller pairings,
ventilation, 159 wiring, 12 11, 48
commissioning, 1, 8, 42, 97, 117, 122, CSC, 12 EX2 expansion modules, 12
141, 210 custom graphics, VAS, 118 exhaust fan, 6
air handler, 142
communications link, 142
D F
common space DAC failure modes, communications, 244
VAV shutdown delay, 109 object, 47 fan
VAVs, 106 present value chart, 253 exhaust, 6
communicating Present Value, 65 profile, 10, 62 fire control panel, 191
communication daisy-chain configuration flow settings worksheet, 257
failure modes, 244 LonTalk, 41, 42 flow tracking, 13, 58, 181, 188
networks, LonTalk, 9 UCM wiring, 39 negative pressure, 188
stub, 33 dampers positive pressure, 188
communications Traq, 12 setup, 189
BACnet to LonTalk, 64 dedicated ventilation system, 12, 14,
link
181 G
setup, 184 graphics, VAS
checkout without power, 42
VFC box, 183 custom and standard, 118
LonTalk termination resistors, 40
default guidelines
open circuits, 144
values, verify in area, 112 for LonTalk wiring, 38
preliminary checkout, 142
ventilation setpoint, 175
resistance measurements, 143
depressurize, 192 H
short circuits, 144 heating and cooling setpoints, 112
diagnostic, 209
troubleshooting, 143 heating/ventilation
freeze protection, 209
Tracer Summit to MP580/581, 64 operation for specific equipment/
low air flow, 209
configuration, 5 controllers, 225
ventilation flow control, 209
single-duct, 5 hot water valve
digital zone sensor
configure local heat, 37
terminations, 34, 35
inputs, 63 remote heat, 37
outputs, 63 terminations, 37
268 BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009

how controller setup, 53 modes
smoke control works, 196 LED standard operating, 124
the air handler works, 28 status, 209 modules
the system works, 29 level 4 wire specifications, 261 EX2 expansion, 12
the VAV boxes work, 20 levels monitoring
to use auto-commissioning, 207 CO2, 14 CO2 levels, 14
library programs for Tracer Graphical MP580/581
I Programming (TGP) configure inputs, outputs,
important information DischargeAirControl.tgp, 73 variables, 62
AHU and common space VAVs FanControl.tgp, 68 controller setup, 53, 54, 61
controlled by the VAS, 111 OA Damper Control with OA network variable locations, 64
auto-commissioning, 208 CFM.tgp, 76 programming, 61
common space VAVs, 90 setpoints.tgp, 71
configure as VAV check box, 101 line voltage power, 11 N
controlling common space VAVs, locations, network variables for naming devices, 51
91 MP580/581, 64 National Electrical Code, 38
daytime warm-up, 131 LonMark DAC profile (8610), 10 network variable
dedicated ventilation and night LonMark™, 18 inputs, MP580/581, 260
economizing, 182 LonTalk, 8 network variable locations, 64
determining the DAC object’s and 24 Vac power wires, 38 networks
present value, 95
choose an AHU that termination resistors, 38
disabling reheat in VAV boxes, communicates using, 10
125 wiring, 38
comm link neuron ID, assigning, 117
discharge air temperature sensor
and auto-commissioning, 146 digital zone sensor terminations, night
34 cool, 127, 128
flow tracking boxes and VAS, 190
communication link topology, 39 economize, 134, 241
further setup for optimization,
108 communication networks, 9 heat, 125, 127
how VAS determines AHU mode, daisy-chain configuration, 41, 42 heat/cool
92 DDC controller on VAV box, 13 cooling, 233
Tracer SC VAS profile DDC controller on VAV box heating, 235, 237, 239
requirements, 97 (Tracer VV550/551, 13
setback, 124
manual output test and safeties, network variable associations, 64
non-Trane controllers
210 polarity sensitivity, 38
DAC, 17, 18
smoke control example, 191 termination resistors, 38, 40
functional capability, 17
TGP and damper control, 80 VAV air system, 16
SCC, 17
using Trane controllers, 9 VV550/551 terminations, 33
normal start, 223
VAS responds to Area actions, wiring guidelines, 16, 38
123 nviApplicMode, 65
zone sensor terminations, 33
VFC boxes and hot water reheat, nviOccSchedule, 65
182 M O
VFC boxes with electric heat, 182 maintenance, 207
object definitions, 97
inputs, 63 manual output test, 207, 209
AHU, 98
installing initiate, 210
assign LonTalk devices, 115
LonTalk links, 38 maximum air flow, 186
BACnet, 116
IntelliPak, 12 measured primary airflow, 164
DAC profiles for MP580/581, 62
isolating problem VAV boxes, 248 measurement
MP580/581, 99
airflow, 12
L members
SCC for VAV boxes, 100
LCI-I objects
VAS, 105
controller setup, 50–52 DAC, 47
minimum
LCI-I IntelliPak occupancy sensor, 14
air flow, 186
controller setup, 54–55 occupied standby ventilation, 186
outdoor air control, 29
LCI-R DAC open circuit, comm link, 144
BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 269

optimal start R 220
cooling, 215 ratio optimal stop, 229
heating (central heat with no limits, ventilation, 170 parallel fan powered terminal
local heat), 217 units, 23–25
ventilation, 164
heating (local heat with central scenarios, 211
fan), 220 recalculating total airflow, 174
series fan powered terminal
optimal stop, 229 referencers units, 25–27
optimization setup, 106 single duct VAV terminal units,
duct pressure setpoint, 29 temperature sensors to the area, 20–23
112 summary table, 245
duct pressure, possible
problems, 248 requirements timed override, 226
duct static pressure, 153 LonTalk wiring, 38 unoccupied, 231
ventilation, 5, 157 National Electrical Code, 38 series fan powered VAV, 7
ventilation enhancement, 176 polarity, 38 setpoint
ventilation, possible problems, resistors, LonTalk link termination, 40 auto changeover, 58
249 retrofit kit for VV551, 15 default ventilation, 175
outdoor air, 6, 58, 72, 73, 80, 112, 181, RJ-11 jack, 32, 50, 56 setpoints
249 Rover service tool, 8, 51, 55, 61, 67, airflow, 15
output testing, manual, 207, 209 99, 142, 144, 145, 158, 183, 209, 210
effective ventilation, 164
outputs, 63 auto-commissioning VAVs, 145
heating and cooling, 112
P S setup
pairings SCC AH540/541 controller, 50–52
equipment and controllers, 11, 48 objects, 100 areas, 109
parallel fan powered VAV, 6, 7 present value chart, 250 flow tracking, 189
polarity sensitivity, 38 scenarios LCI-I controller, 50–52
power sequence of operation, 211 LCI-I IntelliPak controller, 54–55
considerations, 43 schedules, 114 LCI-R DAC controller, 53
line voltage, 11 sensors MP580/581 controller, 53, 54, 61
pre-configuration checkout for air occupancy, 14 referencers, 106
handlers, 48 reference temperature to area, VAS, 105
Present Value, 65 112 VFC box controller, 185
chart space temperature, 12 short circuit, communication link, 144
DAC, 253 static pressure, 153 shutdown, 193
SCC, 250 zone, 13, 32 shutdown delay, common space
pressure sequence of operation VAV, 109
duct static, 10, 153 communication loss, 243 single-duct configurations, 5
negative flow tracking, 188 for standard applications, 212 sizing the SC, 16
positive flow tracking, 188 general assumptions, 212 smoke control, 5, 181, 191–205
possible duct pressure night economize, 241 equipment and controller
optimization problems, 248 night heat/cool cooling, 233 behavior, 194
static night heat/cool heating smoke control mode
sensor control, 49 (with central heat), 235 depressurize, 192
pressurize, 192 (with local heat and central pressurize, 192
primary airflow, measured, 164 fan), 237 purge, 193
problems (with local heat and no central shutdown, 193
space temperature summary, fan), 239 space temperature
249 normal start, 223 sensor, 12
VAV boxes, isolating, 248 optimal start cooling, 215 summary problems, 249
profile associations, MP580/581, 260 optimal start heating special applications, 181
profile, DAC, 62 (central heat used and local standard graphics, VAS, 118
programming, MP580/581, 61 heat not used), 217
purge, 193 (local heat with a central fan),
270 BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009

standard operating modes VAV ventilation system
night cool, 127 adding to VAS, 108 dedicated, 12
night economize, 134 assign to areas, 110 VFC box, 14, 183
night heat, 125, 127 boxes, 6 controller setup, 185
night setback, 124 calibration, 121 hot water use, 14
operating modes Commercial Voyager, 12 voltage
standard, 124 common space, 106 line, 11
static pressure sensor common space shutdown delay, VV551 retrofit kit, 15
control, 49 109
location, 44, 153 discharge air sensor, 36 W
status LED, 209 isolating problems, 248 wire specifications, level 4, 261
system energy consumption curve, parallel fan powered, 6, 7 wiring
171 reheat, 7 critical inputs, 12
series fan powered, 7 daisy-chain configuration for
T shut off, 6 LonTalk, 42
temperature VAV_Alarm.cpl, 201 distance
auxiliary sensor, 13 VCCF, 15 digital zone sensor, 34
discharge air, 10 VCWF, 15 discharge air temperature
sensors sensor, 36
ventilation, 8, 12, 14, 20, 58
reference to area, 112 wireless receiver, 35
dedicated, 14
space sensor, 12 zone sensor, 33
dedicated systems, 181
termination resistors for LonTalk LonTalk links, 38
flow, 13
links, 38, 40 LonTalk wiring guidelines, 38
flow control, 20
testing, manual output, 207, 209 UCM communications
heating
timed override, 226 daisy chain configuration, 39
operation for specific
topology equipment/controllers, 225 termination resistors for
alternate daisy chain, 39 LonTalk links, 40
occupied standby, 186
daisy chain, 39 optimization, 5, 153, 157 Z
total airflow, recalculating, 174 CO2-based demand controlled zone sensors, 13
Tracer Graphical Programming ventilation, 159
(TGP), 67 hard-wired, 32
enhancement, 176 terminations, 33
Tracer Summit fixed ventilation, 157
auto-commissioning, 147 with communication stub, 33
occupancy based ventilation, with digital display, 33
object definitions, 97 158
workstation, 8 sending min flow to an MP580/
Traq dampers, 12 581 controlled AHU, 169
troubleshooting, 211 sending min flow to the DAC
AHU, 168
U system level action, 164, 173,
universal inputs, 191 175
unoccupied sequence of operation, zone level action, 157
231 possible optimization problems,
249
V ratio, 164
variables, 63 limit for each VAV, 171
VAS limit of the AHU, 170
adding VAV boxes after initial referencer for VFC box, 186
setup, 108
setpoint, effective, 164
assign common space VAVs, 106
ventilation optimization
custom graphics, 118
scheduled ventilation, 160
referencer setup, 106
ventilation ratio limits, 170
setup, 105
standard graphics, 118
BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009 271

272 BAS-APG007-EN, 12/15/2009
Trane and the Trane logo are trademarks of Trane in the United States and other countries. All trademarks
referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Literature Order Number BAS-APG007-EN

Date December 2009
Supersedes New
www.trane.com
For more information, contact your local Trane Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com change design and specifications without notice.

Tracer™ SC Air Systems Application Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tracer™ SC Air Systems Application Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Applications Guide

December 2009 BAS-APG007-EN

Warnings, Cautions, and Notices

 WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Field-applied Controller Programming for Variable Volume and

Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Overall Recommended Process

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Who Does What and When?

Figure 1. Project life-cycle and responsibilities

Pipefitter - Mechanical Contractor

Install BAS Technician(s)

Program Air/Water Balance Contractor

Commission Building Operator

Operate BAS Technician

Optimize Service Technician

Some Assumptions About the Reader

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Figure 2. Single-duct VAV air system

Diffusers (not shown)

Air Handling Unit (AHU)

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Shutoff VAV How it works

VAV with Reheat How it works

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Parallel fan-powered VAV How it works

Series fan-powered VAV How it works

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Building Automation System (BAS)

Tracer SC Variable-Air-Volume Air System Benefits

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Program Air/Water Balance Contractor

Commission Building Operator

Operate BAS Technician

Optimize Service Technician

Air Handling Unit (AHU)

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

M-series Climate Changer Tracer MP580

T-series Climate Changer Tracer MP580

Custom Climate Changer Tracer MP580

Commercial Voyager RTUs LCI-R, BCI-R*

IntelliPak rooftop units (RTUs)

100% outdoor air unit Tracer MP581, UC400, UC600**

Non-Trane air handler Tracer MP581, UC400, UC600**

Limit each AHU controller to controlling only one AHU

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

For VV550/551 only.

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Considerations related to the VV551 Retrofit Kit

LonTalk Wiring Guidelines

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Program Air/Water Balance Contractor

Commission Building Operator

Operate BAS Technician

Optimize Service Technician

How VAV Boxes Work

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

Single-Duct VAV Terminal Units

Ventilation Flow Control

Single-Duct VAV Terminals with Reheat

©2009 Trane. All Rights Reserved.

• Occupied, primary air is hot

Flow Tracking (does not support reheat)